diff options
| author | Dave Love | 1999-10-03 12:39:42 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Dave Love | 1999-10-03 12:39:42 +0000 |
| commit | a933dad155af89ff3e97634c07aa09f9df0fb2b3 (patch) | |
| tree | 43be918d0d87dc41c6051df657247209b1736c82 /etc/NEWS | |
| parent | a7bfd66f45c12ca1b8c158b44c57dc56de13654c (diff) | |
| download | emacs-a933dad155af89ff3e97634c07aa09f9df0fb2b3.tar.gz emacs-a933dad155af89ff3e97634c07aa09f9df0fb2b3.zip | |
#
Diffstat (limited to 'etc/NEWS')
| -rw-r--r-- | etc/NEWS | 6740 |
1 files changed, 6740 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/etc/NEWS b/etc/NEWS new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..33bca865ea0 --- /dev/null +++ b/etc/NEWS | |||
| @@ -0,0 +1,6740 @@ | |||
| 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 23 Jan 1999 | ||
| 2 | Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | ||
| 3 | See the end for copying conditions. | ||
| 4 | |||
| 5 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | ||
| 6 | For older news, see the file ONEWS. | ||
| 7 | |||
| 8 | |||
| 9 | * Changes in Emacs 21.1 | ||
| 10 | |||
| 11 | ** Faces and frame parameters. | ||
| 12 | |||
| 13 | There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | ||
| 14 | Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | ||
| 15 | `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | ||
| 16 | `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | ||
| 17 | sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | ||
| 18 | for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | ||
| 19 | parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | ||
| 20 | |||
| 21 | Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | ||
| 22 | `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | ||
| 23 | `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the | ||
| 24 | `default' face and vice versa. | ||
| 25 | |||
| 26 | ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. | ||
| 27 | |||
| 28 | The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | ||
| 29 | colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | ||
| 30 | correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | ||
| 31 | the screen gamma of a frame's display. | ||
| 32 | |||
| 33 | PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | ||
| 34 | in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | ||
| 35 | color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | ||
| 36 | |||
| 37 | The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | ||
| 38 | `ScreenGamma'. | ||
| 39 | |||
| 40 | ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | ||
| 41 | |||
| 42 | The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | ||
| 43 | Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | ||
| 44 | oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | ||
| 45 | of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | ||
| 46 | the text. | ||
| 47 | |||
| 48 | ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | ||
| 49 | |||
| 50 | The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | ||
| 51 | font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | ||
| 52 | height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | ||
| 53 | These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | ||
| 54 | specify a font. | ||
| 55 | |||
| 56 | Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | ||
| 57 | These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | ||
| 58 | under Lisp changes, below. | ||
| 59 | |||
| 60 | ** New default font is Courier 12pt. | ||
| 61 | |||
| 62 | ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of | ||
| 63 | its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, | ||
| 64 | it is hollow. | ||
| 65 | |||
| 66 | ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | ||
| 67 | truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | ||
| 68 | foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | ||
| 69 | customizing face `fringe'. | ||
| 70 | |||
| 71 | ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You | ||
| 72 | can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. | ||
| 73 | |||
| 74 | ** LessTif support. | ||
| 75 | |||
| 76 | Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will | ||
| 77 | need a version 0.88.1 or later. | ||
| 78 | |||
| 79 | ** Toolkit scroll bars. | ||
| 80 | |||
| 81 | Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | ||
| 82 | LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | ||
| 83 | configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | ||
| 84 | bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | ||
| 85 | bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | ||
| 86 | Emacs. | ||
| 87 | |||
| 88 | When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | ||
| 89 | Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | ||
| 90 | Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | ||
| 91 | Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | ||
| 92 | define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | ||
| 93 | `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | ||
| 94 | |||
| 95 | Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | ||
| 96 | a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | ||
| 97 | directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | ||
| 98 | different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | ||
| 99 | system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | ||
| 100 | add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | ||
| 101 | |||
| 102 | The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | ||
| 103 | `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | ||
| 104 | This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | ||
| 105 | image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | ||
| 106 | Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | ||
| 107 | |||
| 108 | ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | ||
| 109 | |||
| 110 | When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | ||
| 111 | widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | ||
| 112 | Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | ||
| 113 | |||
| 114 | ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | ||
| 115 | |||
| 116 | When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | ||
| 117 | whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | ||
| 118 | defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | ||
| 119 | highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | ||
| 120 | displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | ||
| 121 | whitespace. | ||
| 122 | |||
| 123 | ** Busy-cursor. | ||
| 124 | |||
| 125 | Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the | ||
| 126 | display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | ||
| 127 | |||
| 128 | ** Blinking cursor | ||
| 129 | |||
| 130 | M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | ||
| 131 | terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | ||
| 132 | and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | ||
| 133 | the group `cursor'. | ||
| 134 | |||
| 135 | ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | ||
| 136 | |||
| 137 | This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | ||
| 138 | generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | ||
| 139 | See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | ||
| 140 | details. | ||
| 141 | |||
| 142 | Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | ||
| 143 | have to do anything to activate it. | ||
| 144 | |||
| 145 | ** Tabs and variable-width text. | ||
| 146 | |||
| 147 | Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | ||
| 148 | defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | ||
| 149 | independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | ||
| 150 | Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | ||
| 151 | |||
| 152 | ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | ||
| 153 | |||
| 154 | *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | ||
| 155 | |||
| 156 | emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | ||
| 157 | |||
| 158 | The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif | ||
| 159 | one. | ||
| 160 | |||
| 161 | *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in | ||
| 162 | Motif. | ||
| 163 | |||
| 164 | ** Hscrolling in C code. | ||
| 165 | |||
| 166 | Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically. | ||
| 167 | |||
| 168 | ** Tool bar support. | ||
| 169 | |||
| 170 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | ||
| 171 | how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. | ||
| 172 | |||
| 173 | ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | ||
| 174 | |||
| 175 | Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | ||
| 176 | mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | ||
| 177 | line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | ||
| 178 | about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | ||
| 179 | in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | ||
| 180 | |||
| 181 | Currently, the following actions have been defined: | ||
| 182 | |||
| 183 | - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | ||
| 184 | buffers. | ||
| 185 | |||
| 186 | - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | ||
| 187 | M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | ||
| 188 | |||
| 189 | - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | ||
| 190 | |||
| 191 | - Mouse-1 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') | ||
| 192 | toggles the read-only status. | ||
| 193 | |||
| 194 | - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. | ||
| 195 | |||
| 196 | ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | ||
| 197 | |||
| 198 | When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | ||
| 199 | from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialogs' is | ||
| 200 | non-nil. | ||
| 201 | |||
| 202 | ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | ||
| 203 | |||
| 204 | Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | ||
| 205 | Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | ||
| 206 | the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | ||
| 207 | italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | ||
| 208 | Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | ||
| 209 | attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored. | ||
| 210 | |||
| 211 | ** Sound support | ||
| 212 | |||
| 213 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | ||
| 214 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | ||
| 215 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | ||
| 216 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | ||
| 217 | to enable sound support. | ||
| 218 | |||
| 219 | ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | ||
| 220 | the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | ||
| 221 | forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | ||
| 222 | value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | ||
| 223 | users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | ||
| 224 | even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | ||
| 225 | |||
| 226 | The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | ||
| 227 | |||
| 228 | ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | ||
| 229 | |||
| 230 | As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | ||
| 231 | drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | ||
| 232 | `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | ||
| 233 | |||
| 234 | ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | ||
| 235 | bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | ||
| 236 | |||
| 237 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | ||
| 238 | `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | ||
| 239 | variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | ||
| 240 | |||
| 241 | ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | ||
| 242 | |||
| 243 | When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | ||
| 244 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a | ||
| 245 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | ||
| 246 | fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | ||
| 247 | |||
| 248 | When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | ||
| 249 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a | ||
| 250 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | ||
| 251 | fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | ||
| 252 | |||
| 253 | ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | ||
| 254 | notably at the end of lines. | ||
| 255 | |||
| 256 | All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | ||
| 257 | spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | ||
| 258 | |||
| 259 | ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like | ||
| 260 | query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | ||
| 261 | after each match to get the replacement text. | ||
| 262 | |||
| 263 | ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | ||
| 264 | |||
| 265 | If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are | ||
| 266 | longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is | ||
| 267 | on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size | ||
| 268 | by setting the following variable: | ||
| 269 | |||
| 270 | - User option: max-mini-window-height | ||
| 271 | |||
| 272 | Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | ||
| 273 | fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | ||
| 274 | specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. | ||
| 275 | |||
| 276 | Default is 0.25. | ||
| 277 | |||
| 278 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | ||
| 279 | |||
| 280 | *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | ||
| 281 | created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | ||
| 282 | Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | ||
| 283 | macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | ||
| 284 | sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | ||
| 285 | can be edited from that buffer. | ||
| 286 | |||
| 287 | *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | ||
| 288 | items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | ||
| 289 | `A' to use all marked entries). | ||
| 290 | |||
| 291 | *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | ||
| 292 | memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | ||
| 293 | |||
| 294 | *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | ||
| 295 | in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | ||
| 296 | to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | ||
| 297 | been cited. | ||
| 298 | |||
| 299 | ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) | ||
| 300 | has the following new features: | ||
| 301 | |||
| 302 | *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | ||
| 303 | may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | ||
| 304 | to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | ||
| 305 | time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | ||
| 306 | |||
| 307 | *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | ||
| 308 | feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | ||
| 309 | file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | ||
| 310 | compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | ||
| 311 | pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | ||
| 312 | defaults to 1. | ||
| 313 | |||
| 314 | ** Tooltips. | ||
| 315 | |||
| 316 | Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | ||
| 317 | mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you | ||
| 318 | can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | ||
| 319 | |||
| 320 | Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | ||
| 321 | variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | ||
| 322 | the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | ||
| 323 | tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | ||
| 324 | |||
| 325 | ** Customize changes | ||
| 326 | |||
| 327 | *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | ||
| 328 | `State' menu to add comments. | ||
| 329 | |||
| 330 | *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | ||
| 331 | Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | ||
| 332 | default). | ||
| 333 | |||
| 334 | ** New features in evaluation commands | ||
| 335 | |||
| 336 | The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp | ||
| 337 | modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | ||
| 338 | print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | ||
| 339 | customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | ||
| 340 | eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | ||
| 341 | |||
| 342 | ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. | ||
| 343 | To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' | ||
| 344 | modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment | ||
| 345 | start sequences. | ||
| 346 | |||
| 347 | ** Dired changes | ||
| 348 | |||
| 349 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | ||
| 350 | command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | ||
| 351 | is, delete only empty directories. | ||
| 352 | |||
| 353 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | ||
| 354 | command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | ||
| 355 | copy directories recursively. | ||
| 356 | |||
| 357 | ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to | ||
| 358 | use the -f option when sending mail. | ||
| 359 | |||
| 360 | ** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | ||
| 361 | selection into the search string rather than giving an error. | ||
| 362 | |||
| 363 | ** New modes and packages | ||
| 364 | |||
| 365 | *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. | ||
| 366 | |||
| 367 | *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. | ||
| 368 | |||
| 369 | *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | ||
| 370 | |||
| 371 | *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | ||
| 372 | Pascal) language. | ||
| 373 | |||
| 374 | *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | ||
| 375 | the text at point. | ||
| 376 | |||
| 377 | *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | ||
| 378 | |||
| 379 | *** whitespace.el ??? | ||
| 380 | |||
| 381 | ** Withdrawn packages | ||
| 382 | |||
| 383 | *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | ||
| 384 | functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | ||
| 385 | |||
| 386 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | ||
| 387 | |||
| 388 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | ||
| 389 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | ||
| 390 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | ||
| 391 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | ||
| 392 | |||
| 393 | ** New function `propertize' | ||
| 394 | |||
| 395 | The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | ||
| 396 | strings with text properties. | ||
| 397 | |||
| 398 | - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | ||
| 399 | |||
| 400 | Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | ||
| 401 | by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | ||
| 402 | PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | ||
| 403 | specified value of that property. Example: | ||
| 404 | |||
| 405 | (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | ||
| 406 | |||
| 407 | +++ | ||
| 408 | ** push and pop macros. | ||
| 409 | |||
| 410 | A simple version of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp | ||
| 411 | is now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols | ||
| 412 | as the place that holds the list to be changed. | ||
| 413 | |||
| 414 | (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | ||
| 415 | (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | ||
| 416 | (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | ||
| 417 | |||
| 418 | +++ | ||
| 419 | ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such | ||
| 420 | as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. | ||
| 421 | |||
| 422 | [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | ||
| 423 | [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | ||
| 424 | [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | ||
| 425 | [:blank:] matches space and tab only | ||
| 426 | [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | ||
| 427 | space, and DEL. | ||
| 428 | [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | ||
| 429 | and DEL. | ||
| 430 | [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | ||
| 431 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | ||
| 432 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | ||
| 433 | [:alpha:] matches letters. | ||
| 434 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | ||
| 435 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | ||
| 436 | [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | ||
| 437 | [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | ||
| 438 | [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | ||
| 439 | [:punct:] matches punctuation. | ||
| 440 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | ||
| 441 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | ||
| 442 | [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | ||
| 443 | [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | ||
| 444 | [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | ||
| 445 | |||
| 446 | +++ | ||
| 447 | ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | ||
| 448 | |||
| 449 | The following functions are defined for hash tables: | ||
| 450 | |||
| 451 | - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | ||
| 452 | |||
| 453 | The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | ||
| 454 | are optional. The following arguments are defined: | ||
| 455 | |||
| 456 | :test TEST | ||
| 457 | |||
| 458 | TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | ||
| 459 | Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | ||
| 460 | it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | ||
| 461 | |||
| 462 | :size SIZE | ||
| 463 | |||
| 464 | SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | ||
| 465 | many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | ||
| 466 | |||
| 467 | :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | ||
| 468 | |||
| 469 | REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | ||
| 470 | full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | ||
| 471 | size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | ||
| 472 | 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | ||
| 473 | old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | ||
| 474 | |||
| 475 | :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | ||
| 476 | |||
| 477 | THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | ||
| 478 | hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | ||
| 479 | (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | ||
| 480 | |||
| 481 | :weakness WEAK | ||
| 482 | |||
| 483 | WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t. | ||
| 484 | Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if | ||
| 485 | their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the | ||
| 486 | hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | ||
| 487 | |||
| 488 | - Function: makehash &optional TEST | ||
| 489 | |||
| 490 | Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | ||
| 491 | |||
| 492 | - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | ||
| 493 | |||
| 494 | Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | ||
| 495 | |||
| 496 | - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | ||
| 497 | |||
| 498 | Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | ||
| 499 | values are shared. | ||
| 500 | |||
| 501 | - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | ||
| 502 | |||
| 503 | Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | ||
| 504 | |||
| 505 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | ||
| 506 | |||
| 507 | Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | ||
| 508 | |||
| 509 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | ||
| 510 | |||
| 511 | Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | ||
| 512 | |||
| 513 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | ||
| 514 | |||
| 515 | Returns the size of TABLE. | ||
| 516 | |||
| 517 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE | ||
| 518 | |||
| 519 | Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | ||
| 520 | |||
| 521 | - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | ||
| 522 | |||
| 523 | Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | ||
| 524 | |||
| 525 | - Function: clrhash TABLE | ||
| 526 | |||
| 527 | Clear TABLE. | ||
| 528 | |||
| 529 | - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | ||
| 530 | |||
| 531 | Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | ||
| 532 | not found. | ||
| 533 | |||
| 534 | - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE | ||
| 535 | |||
| 536 | Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | ||
| 537 | another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | ||
| 538 | |||
| 539 | - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | ||
| 540 | |||
| 541 | Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | ||
| 542 | |||
| 543 | - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | ||
| 544 | |||
| 545 | Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | ||
| 546 | arguments KEY and VALUE. | ||
| 547 | |||
| 548 | - Function: sxhash OBJ | ||
| 549 | |||
| 550 | Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | ||
| 551 | |||
| 552 | - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | ||
| 553 | |||
| 554 | Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | ||
| 555 | a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | ||
| 556 | comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test | ||
| 557 | and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' | ||
| 558 | of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | ||
| 559 | |||
| 560 | TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | ||
| 561 | |||
| 562 | HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | ||
| 563 | code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | ||
| 564 | integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | ||
| 565 | |||
| 566 | Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | ||
| 567 | be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | ||
| 568 | |||
| 569 | (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | ||
| 570 | (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | ||
| 571 | |||
| 572 | (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | ||
| 573 | (sxhash (upcase a))) | ||
| 574 | |||
| 575 | (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= | ||
| 576 | 'case-fold-string-hash)) | ||
| 577 | |||
| 578 | (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | ||
| 579 | |||
| 580 | +++ | ||
| 581 | ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | ||
| 582 | |||
| 583 | It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | ||
| 584 | circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | ||
| 585 | a cons cell which is its own cdr. | ||
| 586 | |||
| 587 | +++ | ||
| 588 | ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | ||
| 589 | |||
| 590 | If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | ||
| 591 | #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | ||
| 592 | |||
| 593 | You can also do several calls to print functions using a common | ||
| 594 | set of #N= constructs; here is how. | ||
| 595 | |||
| 596 | (let ((print-circle t) | ||
| 597 | (print-continuous-numbering t) | ||
| 598 | print-number-table) | ||
| 599 | (print1 ...) | ||
| 600 | (print1 ...) | ||
| 601 | ...) | ||
| 602 | |||
| 603 | +++ | ||
| 604 | ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | ||
| 605 | t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | ||
| 606 | specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | ||
| 607 | is too short to reach that column. | ||
| 608 | |||
| 609 | +++ | ||
| 610 | ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | ||
| 611 | now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | ||
| 612 | after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | ||
| 613 | two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | ||
| 614 | |||
| 615 | If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | ||
| 616 | perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | ||
| 617 | and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | ||
| 618 | |||
| 619 | +++ | ||
| 620 | ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | ||
| 621 | to specify which buffer to return the size of. | ||
| 622 | |||
| 623 | +++ | ||
| 624 | ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | ||
| 625 | calendar-move-hook after moving point. | ||
| 626 | |||
| 627 | +++ | ||
| 628 | ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | ||
| 629 | directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | ||
| 630 | small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | ||
| 631 | small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | ||
| 632 | temporary-file-directory instead. | ||
| 633 | |||
| 634 | +++ | ||
| 635 | ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | ||
| 636 | the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | ||
| 637 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | ||
| 638 | hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | ||
| 639 | |||
| 640 | +++ | ||
| 641 | ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | ||
| 642 | elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | ||
| 643 | |||
| 644 | +++ | ||
| 645 | ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | ||
| 646 | |||
| 647 | make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | ||
| 648 | creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | ||
| 649 | ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | ||
| 650 | |||
| 651 | +++ | ||
| 652 | ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | ||
| 653 | |||
| 654 | The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | ||
| 655 | on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | ||
| 656 | is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | ||
| 657 | never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | ||
| 658 | ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | ||
| 659 | overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | ||
| 660 | |||
| 661 | If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | ||
| 662 | that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | ||
| 663 | to get an error if the file exists at that time. | ||
| 664 | The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | ||
| 665 | |||
| 666 | +++ | ||
| 667 | ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | ||
| 668 | |||
| 669 | Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | ||
| 670 | If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | ||
| 671 | ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | ||
| 672 | result string. | ||
| 673 | |||
| 674 | Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | ||
| 675 | string where arguments appear in the result string. | ||
| 676 | |||
| 677 | Example: | ||
| 678 | |||
| 679 | (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | ||
| 680 | (s2 "world")) | ||
| 681 | (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | ||
| 682 | (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | ||
| 683 | (format s1 s2) | ||
| 684 | |||
| 685 | results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | ||
| 686 | |||
| 687 | +++ | ||
| 688 | ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | ||
| 689 | |||
| 690 | Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | ||
| 691 | The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | ||
| 692 | argument in it. | ||
| 693 | |||
| 694 | (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | ||
| 695 | (arg "world")) | ||
| 696 | (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | ||
| 697 | (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | ||
| 698 | (message msg arg)) | ||
| 699 | |||
| 700 | +++ | ||
| 701 | ** Sound support | ||
| 702 | |||
| 703 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | ||
| 704 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | ||
| 705 | |||
| 706 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | ||
| 707 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | ||
| 708 | to enable sound support. | ||
| 709 | |||
| 710 | Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | ||
| 711 | list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | ||
| 712 | when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | ||
| 713 | functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | ||
| 714 | sound to play, before playing the sound. | ||
| 715 | |||
| 716 | The following sound properties are supported: | ||
| 717 | |||
| 718 | - `:file FILE' | ||
| 719 | |||
| 720 | FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | ||
| 721 | searched relative to `data-directory'. | ||
| 722 | |||
| 723 | - `:volume VOLUME' | ||
| 724 | |||
| 725 | VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | ||
| 726 | 0..1. This property is optional. | ||
| 727 | |||
| 728 | Other properties are ignored. | ||
| 729 | |||
| 730 | ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | ||
| 731 | |||
| 732 | * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 | ||
| 733 | |||
| 734 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | ||
| 735 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | ||
| 736 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | ||
| 737 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | ||
| 738 | |||
| 739 | ** New face implementation. | ||
| 740 | |||
| 741 | Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | ||
| 742 | font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | ||
| 743 | |||
| 744 | +++ | ||
| 745 | *** New faces. | ||
| 746 | |||
| 747 | Each face can specify the following display attributes: | ||
| 748 | |||
| 749 | 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | ||
| 750 | |||
| 751 | 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set | ||
| 752 | width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | ||
| 753 | |||
| 754 | 3. Font height in 1/10pt | ||
| 755 | |||
| 756 | 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. | ||
| 757 | |||
| 758 | 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. | ||
| 759 | |||
| 760 | 6. Foreground color. | ||
| 761 | |||
| 762 | 7. Background color. | ||
| 763 | |||
| 764 | 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | ||
| 765 | |||
| 766 | 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | ||
| 767 | |||
| 768 | 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | ||
| 769 | |||
| 770 | 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | ||
| 771 | |||
| 772 | 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | ||
| 773 | color. | ||
| 774 | |||
| 775 | 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | ||
| 776 | color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | ||
| 777 | |||
| 778 | Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | ||
| 779 | same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | ||
| 780 | frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | ||
| 781 | faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | ||
| 782 | with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face | ||
| 783 | attributes mentioned above. | ||
| 784 | |||
| 785 | There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | ||
| 786 | definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | ||
| 787 | created frames. | ||
| 788 | |||
| 789 | A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified | ||
| 790 | have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | ||
| 791 | `fully-specified'. | ||
| 792 | |||
| 793 | +++ | ||
| 794 | *** Face merging. | ||
| 795 | |||
| 796 | The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | ||
| 797 | combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | ||
| 798 | aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | ||
| 799 | properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | ||
| 800 | that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | ||
| 801 | results in a fully-specified face. | ||
| 802 | |||
| 803 | +++ | ||
| 804 | *** Face realization. | ||
| 805 | |||
| 806 | After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | ||
| 807 | merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | ||
| 808 | realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | ||
| 809 | available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | ||
| 810 | face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | ||
| 811 | cache of the frame on which it was realized. | ||
| 812 | |||
| 813 | Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | ||
| 814 | character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | ||
| 815 | for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | ||
| 816 | charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | ||
| 817 | |||
| 818 | Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | ||
| 819 | specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | ||
| 820 | being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | ||
| 821 | the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | ||
| 822 | statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | ||
| 823 | |||
| 824 | In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | ||
| 825 | `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | ||
| 826 | 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | ||
| 827 | the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | ||
| 828 | initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | ||
| 829 | Emacs. | ||
| 830 | |||
| 831 | Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | ||
| 832 | `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | ||
| 833 | registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | ||
| 834 | with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | ||
| 835 | |||
| 836 | ++++ | ||
| 837 | **** Clearing face caches. | ||
| 838 | |||
| 839 | The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | ||
| 840 | on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | ||
| 841 | unused fonts. | ||
| 842 | |||
| 843 | +++ | ||
| 844 | *** Font selection. | ||
| 845 | |||
| 846 | Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a | ||
| 847 | given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | ||
| 848 | for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | ||
| 849 | |||
| 850 | If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | ||
| 851 | pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | ||
| 852 | family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | ||
| 853 | property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | ||
| 854 | an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | ||
| 855 | |||
| 856 | Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | ||
| 857 | against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | ||
| 858 | match for the given face attributes in this font list. | ||
| 859 | |||
| 860 | Font selection can be influenced by the user. | ||
| 861 | |||
| 862 | The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | ||
| 863 | attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | ||
| 864 | face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | ||
| 865 | names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | ||
| 866 | that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | ||
| 867 | width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | ||
| 868 | to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | ||
| 869 | |||
| 870 | Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to | ||
| 871 | specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a | ||
| 872 | face doesn't exist. | ||
| 873 | |||
| 874 | +++ | ||
| 875 | **** Scalable fonts | ||
| 876 | |||
| 877 | Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | ||
| 878 | since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | ||
| 879 | servers. | ||
| 880 | |||
| 881 | To enable scalable font use, set the variable | ||
| 882 | `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means nver use | ||
| 883 | scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. | ||
| 884 | Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | ||
| 885 | scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | ||
| 886 | that list. Example: | ||
| 887 | |||
| 888 | (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | ||
| 889 | |||
| 890 | allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | ||
| 891 | |||
| 892 | +++ | ||
| 893 | *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | ||
| 894 | |||
| 895 | - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | ||
| 896 | |||
| 897 | Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | ||
| 898 | is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | ||
| 899 | string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | ||
| 900 | |||
| 901 | If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | ||
| 902 | the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | ||
| 903 | FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | ||
| 904 | POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | ||
| 905 | SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | ||
| 906 | These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | ||
| 907 | if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | ||
| 908 | REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | ||
| 909 | the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | ||
| 910 | of the face font sort order. | ||
| 911 | |||
| 912 | - Function: x-font-family-list | ||
| 913 | |||
| 914 | Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | ||
| 915 | omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | ||
| 916 | (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | ||
| 917 | non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | ||
| 918 | |||
| 919 | - Variable: font-list-limit | ||
| 920 | |||
| 921 | Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | ||
| 922 | won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | ||
| 923 | matching font. The default is currently 100. | ||
| 924 | |||
| 925 | +++ | ||
| 926 | *** Setting face attributes. | ||
| 927 | |||
| 928 | For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | ||
| 929 | with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | ||
| 930 | implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | ||
| 931 | `face-attribute'. | ||
| 932 | |||
| 933 | Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | ||
| 934 | symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | ||
| 935 | |||
| 936 | The following attributes are recognized: | ||
| 937 | |||
| 938 | `:family' | ||
| 939 | |||
| 940 | VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | ||
| 941 | or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | ||
| 942 | and `?' are allowed. | ||
| 943 | |||
| 944 | `:width' | ||
| 945 | |||
| 946 | VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | ||
| 947 | It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | ||
| 948 | `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | ||
| 949 | `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | ||
| 950 | |||
| 951 | `:height' | ||
| 952 | |||
| 953 | VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in | ||
| 954 | 1/10 pt. | ||
| 955 | |||
| 956 | `:weight' | ||
| 957 | |||
| 958 | VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | ||
| 959 | symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | ||
| 960 | `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | ||
| 961 | |||
| 962 | `:slant' | ||
| 963 | |||
| 964 | VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | ||
| 965 | symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | ||
| 966 | `reverse-oblique'. | ||
| 967 | |||
| 968 | `:foreground', `:background' | ||
| 969 | |||
| 970 | VALUE must be a color name, a string. | ||
| 971 | |||
| 972 | `:underline' | ||
| 973 | |||
| 974 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | ||
| 975 | VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | ||
| 976 | a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | ||
| 977 | don't underline. | ||
| 978 | |||
| 979 | `:overline' | ||
| 980 | |||
| 981 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | ||
| 982 | VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | ||
| 983 | string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | ||
| 984 | overline. | ||
| 985 | |||
| 986 | `:strike-through' | ||
| 987 | |||
| 988 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | ||
| 989 | striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | ||
| 990 | face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | ||
| 991 | is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | ||
| 992 | |||
| 993 | `:box' | ||
| 994 | |||
| 995 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | ||
| 996 | around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | ||
| 997 | VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | ||
| 998 | of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | ||
| 999 | and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | ||
| 1000 | VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | ||
| 1001 | :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | ||
| 1002 | the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | ||
| 1003 | specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | ||
| 1004 | defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | ||
| 1005 | the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | ||
| 1006 | color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | ||
| 1007 | should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | ||
| 1008 | like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | ||
| 1009 | that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | ||
| 1010 | the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | ||
| 1011 | box. | ||
| 1012 | |||
| 1013 | `:inverse-video' | ||
| 1014 | |||
| 1015 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | ||
| 1016 | inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | ||
| 1017 | |||
| 1018 | `:stipple' | ||
| 1019 | |||
| 1020 | If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | ||
| 1021 | The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | ||
| 1022 | searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | ||
| 1023 | HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | ||
| 1024 | is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | ||
| 1025 | explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | ||
| 1026 | |||
| 1027 | For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | ||
| 1028 | and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | ||
| 1029 | |||
| 1030 | `:font' | ||
| 1031 | |||
| 1032 | Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | ||
| 1033 | XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | ||
| 1034 | is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | ||
| 1035 | versions of Emacs. | ||
| 1036 | |||
| 1037 | For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | ||
| 1038 | be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | ||
| 1039 | must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | ||
| 1040 | |||
| 1041 | Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | ||
| 1042 | `defface'. | ||
| 1043 | |||
| 1044 | *** Face attributes and X resources | ||
| 1045 | |||
| 1046 | The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | ||
| 1047 | from X resources: | ||
| 1048 | |||
| 1049 | Face attribute X resource class | ||
| 1050 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | ||
| 1051 | :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | ||
| 1052 | :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | ||
| 1053 | :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | ||
| 1054 | :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | ||
| 1055 | :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | ||
| 1056 | foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | ||
| 1057 | :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | ||
| 1058 | :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | ||
| 1059 | :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | ||
| 1060 | :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | ||
| 1061 | :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | ||
| 1062 | :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | ||
| 1063 | :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | ||
| 1064 | or attributeBackgroundPixmap | ||
| 1065 | Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap | ||
| 1066 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | ||
| 1067 | :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | ||
| 1068 | :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | ||
| 1069 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | ||
| 1070 | |||
| 1071 | +++ | ||
| 1072 | *** Text property `face'. | ||
| 1073 | |||
| 1074 | The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | ||
| 1075 | specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | ||
| 1076 | specification can be | ||
| 1077 | |||
| 1078 | 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | ||
| 1079 | |||
| 1080 | 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | ||
| 1081 | KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | ||
| 1082 | for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | ||
| 1083 | for face attribute names. | ||
| 1084 | |||
| 1085 | 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | ||
| 1086 | (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | ||
| 1087 | for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | ||
| 1088 | |||
| 1089 | +++ | ||
| 1090 | ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | ||
| 1091 | |||
| 1092 | The function `face-register-tty-color' can be used to define colors | ||
| 1093 | for use on TTY frames. It maps a color name to a color number on the | ||
| 1094 | terminal. Emacs defines a couple of default color mappings by | ||
| 1095 | default. You can get defined colors with a call to | ||
| 1096 | `tty-defined-colors'. The function `face-clear-tty-colors' can be | ||
| 1097 | used to clear the mapping table. | ||
| 1098 | |||
| 1099 | +++ | ||
| 1100 | ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | ||
| 1101 | This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. | ||
| 1102 | |||
| 1103 | A number of functions such as forward-word, forward-sentence, | ||
| 1104 | forward-paragraph, and beginning-of-line, stop moving when they | ||
| 1105 | come to the boundary between the prompt and the actual contents. | ||
| 1106 | The function erase-buffer does not delete the prompt. | ||
| 1107 | |||
| 1108 | The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the | ||
| 1109 | end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | ||
| 1110 | Otherwise, it returns zero. | ||
| 1111 | |||
| 1112 | The function buffer-string does not return the portion of the | ||
| 1113 | mini-buffer belonging to the prompt; buffer-substring does. | ||
| 1114 | |||
| 1115 | +++ | ||
| 1116 | ** Image support. | ||
| 1117 | |||
| 1118 | Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | ||
| 1119 | strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | ||
| 1120 | (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | ||
| 1121 | replaces the display of the characters having that property. | ||
| 1122 | |||
| 1123 | If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | ||
| 1124 | `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | ||
| 1125 | AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | ||
| 1126 | window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | ||
| 1127 | area. | ||
| 1128 | |||
| 1129 | IMAGE is an image specification. | ||
| 1130 | |||
| 1131 | *** Image specifications | ||
| 1132 | |||
| 1133 | Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | ||
| 1134 | is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | ||
| 1135 | specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | ||
| 1136 | symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. | ||
| 1137 | |||
| 1138 | The following is a list of properties all image types share. | ||
| 1139 | |||
| 1140 | `:ascent ASCENT' | ||
| 1141 | |||
| 1142 | ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage | ||
| 1143 | of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50. | ||
| 1144 | |||
| 1145 | `:margin MARGIN' | ||
| 1146 | |||
| 1147 | MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as | ||
| 1148 | margin around the image. Default is 0. | ||
| 1149 | |||
| 1150 | `:relief RELIEF' | ||
| 1151 | |||
| 1152 | RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | ||
| 1153 | around an image. | ||
| 1154 | |||
| 1155 | `:algorithm ALGO' | ||
| 1156 | |||
| 1157 | Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must | ||
| 1158 | be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is | ||
| 1159 | supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image | ||
| 1160 | which is intended to display images "disabled." | ||
| 1161 | |||
| 1162 | `:heuristic-mask BG' | ||
| 1163 | |||
| 1164 | If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the | ||
| 1165 | background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, | ||
| 1166 | determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 | ||
| 1167 | corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from | ||
| 1168 | the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must | ||
| 1169 | be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the | ||
| 1170 | background of the image. | ||
| 1171 | |||
| 1172 | `:file FILE' | ||
| 1173 | |||
| 1174 | Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | ||
| 1175 | search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | ||
| 1176 | building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | ||
| 1177 | may be present in the image specification. | ||
| 1178 | |||
| 1179 | |||
| 1180 | *** Supported image types | ||
| 1181 | |||
| 1182 | **** XBM, iamge type `xbm'. | ||
| 1183 | |||
| 1184 | XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | ||
| 1185 | properties supported are | ||
| 1186 | |||
| 1187 | `:foreground FG' | ||
| 1188 | |||
| 1189 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | ||
| 1190 | is the frame's foreground. | ||
| 1191 | |||
| 1192 | `:background FG' | ||
| 1193 | |||
| 1194 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | ||
| 1195 | the frame's background color. | ||
| 1196 | |||
| 1197 | XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | ||
| 1198 | case, the image specification must contain the following properties | ||
| 1199 | instead of a `:file' property. | ||
| 1200 | |||
| 1201 | `:width WIDTH' | ||
| 1202 | |||
| 1203 | WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | ||
| 1204 | |||
| 1205 | `:height HEIGHT' | ||
| 1206 | |||
| 1207 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | ||
| 1208 | |||
| 1209 | `:data DATA' | ||
| 1210 | |||
| 1211 | DATA must be either | ||
| 1212 | |||
| 1213 | 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | ||
| 1214 | have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | ||
| 1215 | |||
| 1216 | 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | ||
| 1217 | |||
| 1218 | 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | ||
| 1219 | bitmap. | ||
| 1220 | |||
| 1221 | **** XPM, image type `xpm' | ||
| 1222 | |||
| 1223 | XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | ||
| 1224 | `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | ||
| 1225 | found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | ||
| 1226 | `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | ||
| 1227 | |||
| 1228 | Additional image properties supported are: | ||
| 1229 | |||
| 1230 | `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | ||
| 1231 | |||
| 1232 | SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | ||
| 1233 | name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | ||
| 1234 | name. | ||
| 1235 | |||
| 1236 | XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | ||
| 1237 | add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | ||
| 1238 | |||
| 1239 | `:data DATA' | ||
| 1240 | |||
| 1241 | DATA must be a string containing an XPM image. The contents of the | ||
| 1242 | string are of the same format as that of XPM files. | ||
| 1243 | |||
| 1244 | The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | ||
| 1245 | to display compressed images. | ||
| 1246 | |||
| 1247 | **** PBM, image type `pbm' | ||
| 1248 | |||
| 1249 | PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | ||
| 1250 | mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties | ||
| 1251 | defined. | ||
| 1252 | |||
| 1253 | **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | ||
| 1254 | |||
| 1255 | Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | ||
| 1256 | package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | ||
| 1257 | properties defined. | ||
| 1258 | |||
| 1259 | **** TIFF, image type `tiff' | ||
| 1260 | |||
| 1261 | Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | ||
| 1262 | package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | ||
| 1263 | properties defined. | ||
| 1264 | |||
| 1265 | **** GIF, image type `gif' | ||
| 1266 | |||
| 1267 | Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | ||
| 1268 | `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | ||
| 1269 | |||
| 1270 | Additional image properties supported are: | ||
| 1271 | |||
| 1272 | `:index INDEX' | ||
| 1273 | |||
| 1274 | INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | ||
| 1275 | multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. | ||
| 1276 | |||
| 1277 | This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | ||
| 1278 | For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | ||
| 1279 | at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | ||
| 1280 | every 0.1 seconds. | ||
| 1281 | |||
| 1282 | (defun show-anim (file max) | ||
| 1283 | "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | ||
| 1284 | (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | ||
| 1285 | |||
| 1286 | (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | ||
| 1287 | (when (= idx max) | ||
| 1288 | (setq idx 0)) | ||
| 1289 | (let ((img (create-image file nil :index idx))) | ||
| 1290 | (save-excursion | ||
| 1291 | (set-buffer buffer) | ||
| 1292 | (goto-char (point-min)) | ||
| 1293 | (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | ||
| 1294 | (insert-image img "x")) | ||
| 1295 | (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | ||
| 1296 | |||
| 1297 | **** PNG, image type `png' | ||
| 1298 | |||
| 1299 | Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | ||
| 1300 | package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | ||
| 1301 | properties defined. | ||
| 1302 | |||
| 1303 | **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | ||
| 1304 | |||
| 1305 | Additional image properties supported are: | ||
| 1306 | |||
| 1307 | `:pt-width WIDTH' | ||
| 1308 | |||
| 1309 | WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | ||
| 1310 | integer. This is an required property. | ||
| 1311 | |||
| 1312 | `:pt-height HEIGHT' | ||
| 1313 | |||
| 1314 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | ||
| 1315 | must be an integer. This is an required property. | ||
| 1316 | |||
| 1317 | `:bounding-box BOX' | ||
| 1318 | |||
| 1319 | BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | ||
| 1320 | the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | ||
| 1321 | files. This is an required property. | ||
| 1322 | |||
| 1323 | Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | ||
| 1324 | lisp/gs.el. | ||
| 1325 | |||
| 1326 | *** Lisp interface. | ||
| 1327 | |||
| 1328 | The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types | ||
| 1329 | which are supported in the current configuration. | ||
| 1330 | |||
| 1331 | Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | ||
| 1332 | they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | ||
| 1333 | The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | ||
| 1334 | manually. | ||
| 1335 | |||
| 1336 | *** Simplified image API, image.el | ||
| 1337 | |||
| 1338 | The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | ||
| 1339 | creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | ||
| 1340 | can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | ||
| 1341 | define an image based on available image types. The functions | ||
| 1342 | `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | ||
| 1343 | buffer. | ||
| 1344 | |||
| 1345 | +++ | ||
| 1346 | ** Display margins. | ||
| 1347 | |||
| 1348 | Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | ||
| 1349 | and images. | ||
| 1350 | |||
| 1351 | To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | ||
| 1352 | `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | ||
| 1353 | `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | ||
| 1354 | obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | ||
| 1355 | `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | ||
| 1356 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | ||
| 1357 | of the display margins. | ||
| 1358 | |||
| 1359 | You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | ||
| 1360 | containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | ||
| 1361 | one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | ||
| 1362 | string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | ||
| 1363 | in this file). | ||
| 1364 | |||
| 1365 | +++ | ||
| 1366 | ** Help display | ||
| 1367 | |||
| 1368 | Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | ||
| 1369 | moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | ||
| 1370 | `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | ||
| 1371 | that have a `help-echo' property. | ||
| 1372 | |||
| 1373 | The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar | ||
| 1374 | items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display. | ||
| 1375 | If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is | ||
| 1376 | evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the | ||
| 1377 | tool-bar item is used. | ||
| 1378 | |||
| 1379 | The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | ||
| 1380 | help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the | ||
| 1381 | help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | ||
| 1382 | |||
| 1383 | +++ | ||
| 1384 | ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | ||
| 1385 | |||
| 1386 | The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | ||
| 1387 | This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | ||
| 1388 | |||
| 1389 | The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | ||
| 1390 | scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | ||
| 1391 | The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | ||
| 1392 | scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | ||
| 1393 | used. | ||
| 1394 | |||
| 1395 | (global-set-key [A-down] | ||
| 1396 | #'(lambda () | ||
| 1397 | (interactive) | ||
| 1398 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) | ||
| 1399 | (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) | ||
| 1400 | (global-set-key [A-up] | ||
| 1401 | #'(lambda () | ||
| 1402 | (interactive) | ||
| 1403 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) | ||
| 1404 | (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) | ||
| 1405 | |||
| 1406 | +++ | ||
| 1407 | ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | ||
| 1408 | |||
| 1409 | Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | ||
| 1410 | when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | ||
| 1411 | variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | ||
| 1412 | is called with one argument, POS. | ||
| 1413 | |||
| 1414 | At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | ||
| 1415 | characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | ||
| 1416 | as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | ||
| 1417 | property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | ||
| 1418 | `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | ||
| 1419 | |||
| 1420 | +++ | ||
| 1421 | ** Tool bar support. | ||
| 1422 | |||
| 1423 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | ||
| 1424 | parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | ||
| 1425 | controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | ||
| 1426 | suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | ||
| 1427 | `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | ||
| 1428 | automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | ||
| 1429 | |||
| 1430 | *** Tool bar item definitions | ||
| 1431 | |||
| 1432 | Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | ||
| 1433 | `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | ||
| 1434 | where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | ||
| 1435 | |||
| 1436 | CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is | ||
| 1437 | evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | ||
| 1438 | the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | ||
| 1439 | property (see below). | ||
| 1440 | |||
| 1441 | BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as | ||
| 1442 | binding are currently ignored. | ||
| 1443 | |||
| 1444 | The following properties are recognized: | ||
| 1445 | |||
| 1446 | `:enable FORM'. | ||
| 1447 | |||
| 1448 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled | ||
| 1449 | or disabled. | ||
| 1450 | |||
| 1451 | `:visible FORM' | ||
| 1452 | |||
| 1453 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. | ||
| 1454 | |||
| 1455 | `:filter FUNCTION' | ||
| 1456 | |||
| 1457 | FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | ||
| 1458 | FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | ||
| 1459 | used instead of BINDING to display this item. | ||
| 1460 | |||
| 1461 | `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' | ||
| 1462 | |||
| 1463 | TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | ||
| 1464 | and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | ||
| 1465 | |||
| 1466 | `:image IMAGES' | ||
| 1467 | |||
| 1468 | IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | ||
| 1469 | image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | ||
| 1470 | meaning of each of the four elements: | ||
| 1471 | |||
| 1472 | Index Use when item is | ||
| 1473 | ---------------------------------------- | ||
| 1474 | 0 enabled and selected | ||
| 1475 | 1 enabled and deselected | ||
| 1476 | 2 disabled and selected | ||
| 1477 | 3 disabled and deselected | ||
| 1478 | |||
| 1479 | `:help HELP-STRING'. | ||
| 1480 | |||
| 1481 | Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help | ||
| 1482 | is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | ||
| 1483 | |||
| 1484 | *** Tool-bar-related variables. | ||
| 1485 | |||
| 1486 | If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | ||
| 1487 | resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | ||
| 1488 | than 1/4 of the frame's size. | ||
| 1489 | |||
| 1490 | If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be | ||
| 1491 | raised when the mouse moves over them. | ||
| 1492 | |||
| 1493 | You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | ||
| 1494 | `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | ||
| 1495 | pixels. Default is 1. | ||
| 1496 | |||
| 1497 | You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | ||
| 1498 | `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | ||
| 1499 | |||
| 1500 | *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | ||
| 1501 | |||
| 1502 | You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | ||
| 1503 | a tool bar item. If | ||
| 1504 | |||
| 1505 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | ||
| 1506 | '(menu-item "Shell" shell | ||
| 1507 | :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | ||
| 1508 | |||
| 1509 | is the original tool bar item definition, then | ||
| 1510 | |||
| 1511 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | ||
| 1512 | |||
| 1513 | makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | ||
| 1514 | item. | ||
| 1515 | |||
| 1516 | ** Mode line changes. | ||
| 1517 | |||
| 1518 | +++ | ||
| 1519 | *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | ||
| 1520 | |||
| 1521 | The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | ||
| 1522 | that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | ||
| 1523 | a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | ||
| 1524 | |||
| 1525 | 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | ||
| 1526 | a `local-map' text property. | ||
| 1527 | |||
| 1528 | 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | ||
| 1529 | that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | ||
| 1530 | |||
| 1531 | 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | ||
| 1532 | is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | ||
| 1533 | `local-map' property. | ||
| 1534 | |||
| 1535 | The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | ||
| 1536 | properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | ||
| 1537 | example. | ||
| 1538 | |||
| 1539 | +++ | ||
| 1540 | *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | ||
| 1541 | variable mode-line-format to nil. | ||
| 1542 | |||
| 1543 | +++ | ||
| 1544 | *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | ||
| 1545 | |||
| 1546 | This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | ||
| 1547 | `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | ||
| 1548 | completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | ||
| 1549 | `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | ||
| 1550 | line. | ||
| 1551 | |||
| 1552 | The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | ||
| 1553 | `header-line'. | ||
| 1554 | |||
| 1555 | The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | ||
| 1556 | position in the header-line. | ||
| 1557 | |||
| 1558 | +++ | ||
| 1559 | ** Text property `display' | ||
| 1560 | |||
| 1561 | The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and | ||
| 1562 | also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the | ||
| 1563 | `display' property should be a display specification, as described | ||
| 1564 | below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | ||
| 1565 | |||
| 1566 | *** Variable width and height spaces | ||
| 1567 | |||
| 1568 | To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | ||
| 1569 | specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | ||
| 1570 | `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | ||
| 1571 | area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | ||
| 1572 | marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | ||
| 1573 | displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | ||
| 1574 | simpler form STRETCH as property value. | ||
| 1575 | |||
| 1576 | The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | ||
| 1577 | PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | ||
| 1578 | properties described below. | ||
| 1579 | |||
| 1580 | The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | ||
| 1581 | characters having the `display' property. | ||
| 1582 | |||
| 1583 | - :width WIDTH | ||
| 1584 | |||
| 1585 | Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | ||
| 1586 | character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | ||
| 1587 | |||
| 1588 | - :relative-width FACTOR | ||
| 1589 | |||
| 1590 | Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | ||
| 1591 | first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | ||
| 1592 | same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | ||
| 1593 | width of that character by FACTOR. | ||
| 1594 | |||
| 1595 | - :align-to HPOS | ||
| 1596 | |||
| 1597 | Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | ||
| 1598 | value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | ||
| 1599 | |||
| 1600 | Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | ||
| 1601 | |||
| 1602 | - :height HEIGHT | ||
| 1603 | |||
| 1604 | Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | ||
| 1605 | normal line height. | ||
| 1606 | |||
| 1607 | - :relative-height FACTOR | ||
| 1608 | |||
| 1609 | The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | ||
| 1610 | of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | ||
| 1611 | |||
| 1612 | - :ascent ASCENT | ||
| 1613 | |||
| 1614 | Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | ||
| 1615 | used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | ||
| 1616 | baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | ||
| 1617 | equal to 100. | ||
| 1618 | |||
| 1619 | You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | ||
| 1620 | |||
| 1621 | *** Images | ||
| 1622 | |||
| 1623 | A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | ||
| 1624 | . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | ||
| 1625 | in the display, the characters having this display specification in | ||
| 1626 | their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | ||
| 1627 | the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | ||
| 1628 | `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | ||
| 1629 | area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | ||
| 1630 | the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | ||
| 1631 | as display specification. | ||
| 1632 | |||
| 1633 | *** Other display properties | ||
| 1634 | |||
| 1635 | - :space-width FACTOR | ||
| 1636 | |||
| 1637 | Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | ||
| 1638 | should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | ||
| 1639 | integer or float. | ||
| 1640 | |||
| 1641 | - :height HEIGHT | ||
| 1642 | |||
| 1643 | Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | ||
| 1644 | |||
| 1645 | If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | ||
| 1646 | means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | ||
| 1647 | the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | ||
| 1648 | ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | ||
| 1649 | a font is available counts as a step. | ||
| 1650 | |||
| 1651 | If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | ||
| 1652 | as tall as the frame's default font. | ||
| 1653 | |||
| 1654 | If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | ||
| 1655 | height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | ||
| 1656 | |||
| 1657 | Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | ||
| 1658 | `height' bound to the current specified font height. | ||
| 1659 | |||
| 1660 | - :raise FACTOR | ||
| 1661 | |||
| 1662 | FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | ||
| 1663 | font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | ||
| 1664 | raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | ||
| 1665 | amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | ||
| 1666 | `:height' subproperty. | ||
| 1667 | |||
| 1668 | *** Conditional display properties | ||
| 1669 | |||
| 1670 | All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | ||
| 1671 | has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | ||
| 1672 | applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | ||
| 1673 | During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of | ||
| 1674 | the text having the `display' property. | ||
| 1675 | |||
| 1676 | The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | ||
| 1677 | `(:when t SPEC)'. | ||
| 1678 | |||
| 1679 | +++ | ||
| 1680 | ** New menu separator types. | ||
| 1681 | |||
| 1682 | Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | ||
| 1683 | item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | ||
| 1684 | treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | ||
| 1685 | to specify other menu separator types. | ||
| 1686 | |||
| 1687 | - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | ||
| 1688 | |||
| 1689 | No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | ||
| 1690 | separator occurs. | ||
| 1691 | |||
| 1692 | - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | ||
| 1693 | |||
| 1694 | A single line in the menu's foreground color. | ||
| 1695 | |||
| 1696 | - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | ||
| 1697 | |||
| 1698 | A double line in the menu's foreground color. | ||
| 1699 | |||
| 1700 | - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | ||
| 1701 | |||
| 1702 | A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | ||
| 1703 | |||
| 1704 | - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | ||
| 1705 | |||
| 1706 | A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | ||
| 1707 | |||
| 1708 | - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | ||
| 1709 | |||
| 1710 | A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form | ||
| 1711 | displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | ||
| 1712 | |||
| 1713 | - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | ||
| 1714 | |||
| 1715 | A single line with 3D raised appearance. | ||
| 1716 | |||
| 1717 | - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | ||
| 1718 | |||
| 1719 | A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | ||
| 1720 | |||
| 1721 | - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | ||
| 1722 | |||
| 1723 | A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | ||
| 1724 | |||
| 1725 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | ||
| 1726 | |||
| 1727 | Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | ||
| 1728 | |||
| 1729 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | ||
| 1730 | |||
| 1731 | Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | ||
| 1732 | |||
| 1733 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | ||
| 1734 | |||
| 1735 | Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | ||
| 1736 | |||
| 1737 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | ||
| 1738 | |||
| 1739 | Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | ||
| 1740 | |||
| 1741 | Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | ||
| 1742 | the corresponding single-line separators. | ||
| 1743 | |||
| 1744 | +++ | ||
| 1745 | ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | ||
| 1746 | |||
| 1747 | The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | ||
| 1748 | `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | ||
| 1749 | Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | ||
| 1750 | that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | ||
| 1751 | default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | ||
| 1752 | default background is the background color of the frame, and the | ||
| 1753 | default foreground is black. | ||
| 1754 | |||
| 1755 | The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | ||
| 1756 | (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | ||
| 1757 | `ScrollBarBackground'). | ||
| 1758 | |||
| 1759 | Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | ||
| 1760 | settings for scroll bar colors. | ||
| 1761 | |||
| 1762 | +++ | ||
| 1763 | ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | ||
| 1764 | display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | ||
| 1765 | |||
| 1766 | --- | ||
| 1767 | ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | ||
| 1768 | starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | ||
| 1769 | on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | ||
| 1770 | line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | ||
| 1771 | the original window start. | ||
| 1772 | |||
| 1773 | --- | ||
| 1774 | ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | ||
| 1775 | `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | ||
| 1776 | now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | ||
| 1777 | |||
| 1778 | +++ | ||
| 1779 | ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | ||
| 1780 | |||
| 1781 | A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | ||
| 1782 | `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | ||
| 1783 | windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | ||
| 1784 | other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | ||
| 1785 | |||
| 1786 | The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | ||
| 1787 | fixed-width and fixed-height. | ||
| 1788 | |||
| 1789 | (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | ||
| 1790 | |||
| 1791 | A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | ||
| 1792 | fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | ||
| 1793 | window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | ||
| 1794 | change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | ||
| 1795 | temporarily to nil, for example | ||
| 1796 | |||
| 1797 | (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | ||
| 1798 | (enlarge-window 10)) | ||
| 1799 | |||
| 1800 | Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, | ||
| 1801 | or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. | ||
| 1802 | |||
| 1803 | * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | ||
| 1804 | |||
| 1805 | ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | ||
| 1806 | |||
| 1807 | You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | ||
| 1808 | Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | ||
| 1809 | `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | ||
| 1810 | |||
| 1811 | If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | ||
| 1812 | is the one that is used. | ||
| 1813 | |||
| 1814 | ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | ||
| 1815 | the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | ||
| 1816 | Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | ||
| 1817 | separate from the command's regular output. | ||
| 1818 | Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | ||
| 1819 | says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | ||
| 1820 | In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | ||
| 1821 | the buffer name. | ||
| 1822 | |||
| 1823 | When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | ||
| 1824 | output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | ||
| 1825 | it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | ||
| 1826 | cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | ||
| 1827 | |||
| 1828 | ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | ||
| 1829 | the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | ||
| 1830 | is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | ||
| 1831 | created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | ||
| 1832 | |||
| 1833 | ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | ||
| 1834 | example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | ||
| 1835 | match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | ||
| 1836 | quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | ||
| 1837 | |||
| 1838 | ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | ||
| 1839 | now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | ||
| 1840 | if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | ||
| 1841 | they never ignore case. | ||
| 1842 | |||
| 1843 | ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | ||
| 1844 | under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | ||
| 1845 | applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | ||
| 1846 | of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | ||
| 1847 | just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | ||
| 1848 | convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | ||
| 1849 | part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | ||
| 1850 | |||
| 1851 | If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | ||
| 1852 | the same format that was used in the file before. | ||
| 1853 | |||
| 1854 | You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | ||
| 1855 | `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | ||
| 1856 | |||
| 1857 | ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | ||
| 1858 | renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | ||
| 1859 | This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | ||
| 1860 | |||
| 1861 | ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | ||
| 1862 | The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | ||
| 1863 | buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | ||
| 1864 | your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | ||
| 1865 | is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | ||
| 1866 | end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | ||
| 1867 | Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | ||
| 1868 | |||
| 1869 | The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | ||
| 1870 | eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | ||
| 1871 | control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | ||
| 1872 | format. You can now customize these variables. | ||
| 1873 | |||
| 1874 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | ||
| 1875 | filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | ||
| 1876 | filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | ||
| 1877 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | ||
| 1878 | |||
| 1879 | ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | ||
| 1880 | in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | ||
| 1881 | windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | ||
| 1882 | |||
| 1883 | ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | ||
| 1884 | dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | ||
| 1885 | doesn't have any effect. | ||
| 1886 | |||
| 1887 | ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | ||
| 1888 | not one per buffer. | ||
| 1889 | |||
| 1890 | ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | ||
| 1891 | use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | ||
| 1892 | (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | ||
| 1893 | |||
| 1894 | ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | ||
| 1895 | To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | ||
| 1896 | `auto-show-mode' command. | ||
| 1897 | |||
| 1898 | ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | ||
| 1899 | avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | ||
| 1900 | versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | ||
| 1901 | choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | ||
| 1902 | occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | ||
| 1903 | |||
| 1904 | ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | ||
| 1905 | cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | ||
| 1906 | |||
| 1907 | ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | ||
| 1908 | character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | ||
| 1909 | feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | ||
| 1910 | |||
| 1911 | ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | ||
| 1912 | the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | ||
| 1913 | interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | ||
| 1914 | and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | ||
| 1915 | |||
| 1916 | ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | ||
| 1917 | |||
| 1918 | The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | ||
| 1919 | that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | ||
| 1920 | one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | ||
| 1921 | codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | ||
| 1922 | set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | ||
| 1923 | |||
| 1924 | Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | ||
| 1925 | from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | ||
| 1926 | |||
| 1927 | IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | ||
| 1928 | equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | ||
| 1929 | a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | ||
| 1930 | `?' on other systems. | ||
| 1931 | |||
| 1932 | IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | ||
| 1933 | feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | ||
| 1934 | Unix. | ||
| 1935 | |||
| 1936 | Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | ||
| 1937 | current codepage when it starts. | ||
| 1938 | |||
| 1939 | ** Mail changes | ||
| 1940 | |||
| 1941 | *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | ||
| 1942 | default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | ||
| 1943 | default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | ||
| 1944 | sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | ||
| 1945 | buffer-file-coding-system. | ||
| 1946 | |||
| 1947 | You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | ||
| 1948 | sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | ||
| 1949 | mail. | ||
| 1950 | |||
| 1951 | *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | ||
| 1952 | if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | ||
| 1953 | Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | ||
| 1954 | list of possible coding systems. | ||
| 1955 | |||
| 1956 | ** CC Mode changes | ||
| 1957 | |||
| 1958 | *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | ||
| 1959 | modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | ||
| 1960 | longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | ||
| 1961 | docstring for details. | ||
| 1962 | |||
| 1963 | *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | ||
| 1964 | symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | ||
| 1965 | found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | ||
| 1966 | prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | ||
| 1967 | lineup functions use this feature currently. | ||
| 1968 | |||
| 1969 | *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | ||
| 1970 | "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | ||
| 1971 | |||
| 1972 | *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | ||
| 1973 | "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | ||
| 1974 | |||
| 1975 | *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | ||
| 1976 | from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | ||
| 1977 | symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | ||
| 1978 | c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | ||
| 1979 | anonymous classes. | ||
| 1980 | |||
| 1981 | *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | ||
| 1982 | syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | ||
| 1983 | |||
| 1984 | *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | ||
| 1985 | inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | ||
| 1986 | support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | ||
| 1987 | function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | ||
| 1988 | |||
| 1989 | *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | ||
| 1990 | (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | ||
| 1991 | brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | ||
| 1992 | c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | ||
| 1993 | (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | ||
| 1994 | |||
| 1995 | *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | ||
| 1996 | |||
| 1997 | *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | ||
| 1998 | |||
| 1999 | *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | ||
| 2000 | for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | ||
| 2001 | |||
| 2002 | *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | ||
| 2003 | |||
| 2004 | *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | ||
| 2005 | associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | ||
| 2006 | This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | ||
| 2007 | circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | ||
| 2008 | class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | ||
| 2009 | |||
| 2010 | ** Gnus changes. | ||
| 2011 | |||
| 2012 | *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | ||
| 2013 | added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | ||
| 2014 | Gnus manual for the full story. | ||
| 2015 | |||
| 2016 | *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | ||
| 2017 | before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | ||
| 2018 | group, which is created automatically. | ||
| 2019 | |||
| 2020 | *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | ||
| 2021 | values. | ||
| 2022 | |||
| 2023 | *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | ||
| 2024 | |||
| 2025 | *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | ||
| 2026 | outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | ||
| 2027 | |||
| 2028 | *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | ||
| 2029 | `C-u C-c C-c'. | ||
| 2030 | |||
| 2031 | *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | ||
| 2032 | |||
| 2033 | *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | ||
| 2034 | re-highlighting of the article buffer. | ||
| 2035 | |||
| 2036 | *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | ||
| 2037 | |||
| 2038 | *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | ||
| 2039 | Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | ||
| 2040 | |||
| 2041 | *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | ||
| 2042 | `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | ||
| 2043 | |||
| 2044 | *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | ||
| 2045 | control over simplification. | ||
| 2046 | |||
| 2047 | *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | ||
| 2048 | |||
| 2049 | *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | ||
| 2050 | limit. | ||
| 2051 | |||
| 2052 | *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | ||
| 2053 | |||
| 2054 | *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | ||
| 2055 | |||
| 2056 | *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | ||
| 2057 | If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | ||
| 2058 | rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | ||
| 2059 | |||
| 2060 | *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | ||
| 2061 | `a' forces normal posting method. | ||
| 2062 | |||
| 2063 | *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | ||
| 2064 | -- `W d'. | ||
| 2065 | |||
| 2066 | *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | ||
| 2067 | to a non-nil value. | ||
| 2068 | |||
| 2069 | *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | ||
| 2070 | where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | ||
| 2071 | |||
| 2072 | *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | ||
| 2073 | has been added. | ||
| 2074 | |||
| 2075 | *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | ||
| 2076 | |||
| 2077 | *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | ||
| 2078 | |||
| 2079 | *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | ||
| 2080 | `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | ||
| 2081 | |||
| 2082 | *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | ||
| 2083 | `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | ||
| 2084 | |||
| 2085 | *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | ||
| 2086 | |||
| 2087 | *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | ||
| 2088 | been added. | ||
| 2089 | |||
| 2090 | *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | ||
| 2091 | `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | ||
| 2092 | |||
| 2093 | *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | ||
| 2094 | updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | ||
| 2095 | |||
| 2096 | *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | ||
| 2097 | |||
| 2098 | *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | ||
| 2099 | |||
| 2100 | *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | ||
| 2101 | |||
| 2102 | ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | ||
| 2103 | |||
| 2104 | *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | ||
| 2105 | options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | ||
| 2106 | nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | ||
| 2107 | |||
| 2108 | *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | ||
| 2109 | TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | ||
| 2110 | of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | ||
| 2111 | TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | ||
| 2112 | can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | ||
| 2113 | |||
| 2114 | *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | ||
| 2115 | All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | ||
| 2116 | but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | ||
| 2117 | the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | ||
| 2118 | |||
| 2119 | *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | ||
| 2120 | the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | ||
| 2121 | buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | ||
| 2122 | mismatch. | ||
| 2123 | |||
| 2124 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | ||
| 2125 | |||
| 2126 | *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | ||
| 2127 | file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | ||
| 2128 | |||
| 2129 | *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | ||
| 2130 | lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | ||
| 2131 | characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | ||
| 2132 | removed from the label. | ||
| 2133 | |||
| 2134 | *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | ||
| 2135 | a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | ||
| 2136 | |||
| 2137 | *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | ||
| 2138 | customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | ||
| 2139 | |||
| 2140 | *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | ||
| 2141 | `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | ||
| 2142 | expressions. | ||
| 2143 | |||
| 2144 | *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | ||
| 2145 | |||
| 2146 | ** New/deleted modes and packages | ||
| 2147 | |||
| 2148 | *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | ||
| 2149 | SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | ||
| 2150 | |||
| 2151 | *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | ||
| 2152 | editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | ||
| 2153 | SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | ||
| 2154 | |||
| 2155 | *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | ||
| 2156 | changes with a special face. | ||
| 2157 | |||
| 2158 | *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | ||
| 2159 | this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | ||
| 2160 | Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | ||
| 2161 | |||
| 2162 | * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | ||
| 2163 | |||
| 2164 | ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | ||
| 2165 | This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | ||
| 2166 | conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | ||
| 2167 | and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | ||
| 2168 | check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | ||
| 2169 | |||
| 2170 | The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | ||
| 2171 | Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | ||
| 2172 | distribution when the config.bat script is run. | ||
| 2173 | |||
| 2174 | ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | ||
| 2175 | MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | ||
| 2176 | controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | ||
| 2177 | directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | ||
| 2178 | Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | ||
| 2179 | on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | ||
| 2180 | string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | ||
| 2181 | program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | ||
| 2182 | printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | ||
| 2183 | |||
| 2184 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | ||
| 2185 | output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | ||
| 2186 | available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | ||
| 2187 | input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | ||
| 2188 | temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | ||
| 2189 | program. | ||
| 2190 | |||
| 2191 | An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | ||
| 2192 | and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | ||
| 2193 | programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | ||
| 2194 | automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | ||
| 2195 | as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | ||
| 2196 | ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | ||
| 2197 | |||
| 2198 | ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | ||
| 2199 | a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | ||
| 2200 | MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | ||
| 2201 | was not documented clearly before. | ||
| 2202 | |||
| 2203 | ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | ||
| 2204 | This includes Tetris and Snake. | ||
| 2205 | |||
| 2206 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | ||
| 2207 | |||
| 2208 | ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | ||
| 2209 | return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | ||
| 2210 | They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | ||
| 2211 | meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | ||
| 2212 | |||
| 2213 | ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | ||
| 2214 | WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | ||
| 2215 | and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | ||
| 2216 | |||
| 2217 | ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | ||
| 2218 | |||
| 2219 | *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | ||
| 2220 | It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | ||
| 2221 | |||
| 2222 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | ||
| 2223 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | ||
| 2224 | integers. | ||
| 2225 | |||
| 2226 | ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | ||
| 2227 | files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | ||
| 2228 | arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | ||
| 2229 | file names and attributes are returned. | ||
| 2230 | |||
| 2231 | ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | ||
| 2232 | sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | ||
| 2233 | accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. | ||
| 2234 | It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | ||
| 2235 | returns the result. | ||
| 2236 | |||
| 2237 | ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | ||
| 2238 | to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | ||
| 2239 | |||
| 2240 | ** New functions for base64 conversion: | ||
| 2241 | |||
| 2242 | The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | ||
| 2243 | into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | ||
| 2244 | performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | ||
| 2245 | optionally. | ||
| 2246 | |||
| 2247 | Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | ||
| 2248 | job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | ||
| 2249 | |||
| 2250 | ** | ||
| 2251 | The new function process-running-child-p | ||
| 2252 | will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | ||
| 2253 | terminal to its own child process. | ||
| 2254 | |||
| 2255 | ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | ||
| 2256 | when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | ||
| 2257 | to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | ||
| 2258 | itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | ||
| 2259 | |||
| 2260 | ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | ||
| 2261 | be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | ||
| 2262 | |||
| 2263 | ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | ||
| 2264 | :included is an alias for :visible. | ||
| 2265 | |||
| 2266 | easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | ||
| 2267 | easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | ||
| 2268 | to move or copy menu entries. | ||
| 2269 | |||
| 2270 | ** Multibyte editing changes | ||
| 2271 | |||
| 2272 | *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | ||
| 2273 | an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | ||
| 2274 | make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | ||
| 2275 | work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | ||
| 2276 | char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | ||
| 2277 | (setq char (sref str idx) | ||
| 2278 | idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | ||
| 2279 | The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | ||
| 2280 | |||
| 2281 | If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | ||
| 2282 | (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | ||
| 2283 | (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | ||
| 2284 | |||
| 2285 | *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | ||
| 2286 | region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | ||
| 2287 | deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | ||
| 2288 | |||
| 2289 | Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted | ||
| 2290 | |||
| 2291 | This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | ||
| 2292 | across the boundary. | ||
| 2293 | |||
| 2294 | *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | ||
| 2295 | `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | ||
| 2296 | o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | ||
| 2297 | contains 8-bit characters. | ||
| 2298 | o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | ||
| 2299 | contains invalid characters. | ||
| 2300 | |||
| 2301 | *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | ||
| 2302 | text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | ||
| 2303 | preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | ||
| 2304 | text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | ||
| 2305 | way. | ||
| 2306 | |||
| 2307 | *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | ||
| 2308 | If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | ||
| 2309 | end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | ||
| 2310 | prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | ||
| 2311 | |||
| 2312 | *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | ||
| 2313 | compose Thai characters in a string. | ||
| 2314 | |||
| 2315 | ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | ||
| 2316 | argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | ||
| 2317 | for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | ||
| 2318 | menus should always use the third argument. | ||
| 2319 | |||
| 2320 | ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | ||
| 2321 | read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | ||
| 2322 | arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | ||
| 2323 | input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | ||
| 2324 | |||
| 2325 | ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | ||
| 2326 | of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | ||
| 2327 | programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | ||
| 2328 | inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | ||
| 2329 | |||
| 2330 | ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | ||
| 2331 | the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | ||
| 2332 | returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | ||
| 2333 | echo area contents. | ||
| 2334 | |||
| 2335 | (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | ||
| 2336 | |||
| 2337 | ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | ||
| 2338 | NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | ||
| 2339 | requested feature cannot be loaded. | ||
| 2340 | |||
| 2341 | ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | ||
| 2342 | foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | ||
| 2343 | means to clear out that attribute. | ||
| 2344 | |||
| 2345 | ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | ||
| 2346 | gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | ||
| 2347 | |||
| 2348 | ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | ||
| 2349 | read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | ||
| 2350 | unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | ||
| 2351 | end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | ||
| 2352 | |||
| 2353 | ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | ||
| 2354 | the gap of the current buffer. | ||
| 2355 | |||
| 2356 | ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | ||
| 2357 | to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | ||
| 2358 | current buffer. | ||
| 2359 | |||
| 2360 | ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | ||
| 2361 | facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | ||
| 2362 | These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | ||
| 2363 | it back in after any modifications have been made. | ||
| 2364 | |||
| 2365 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | ||
| 2366 | |||
| 2367 | ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | ||
| 2368 | the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | ||
| 2369 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | ||
| 2370 | directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | ||
| 2371 | subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | ||
| 2372 | |||
| 2373 | Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | ||
| 2374 | names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | ||
| 2375 | Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | ||
| 2376 | which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | ||
| 2377 | these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | ||
| 2378 | |||
| 2379 | Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | ||
| 2380 | starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | ||
| 2381 | time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | ||
| 2382 | |||
| 2383 | This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | ||
| 2384 | Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | ||
| 2385 | to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | ||
| 2386 | subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | ||
| 2387 | `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | ||
| 2388 | results. | ||
| 2389 | |||
| 2390 | ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | ||
| 2391 | GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | ||
| 2392 | that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | ||
| 2393 | fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | ||
| 2394 | |||
| 2395 | * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | ||
| 2396 | |||
| 2397 | ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | ||
| 2398 | including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | ||
| 2399 | it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | ||
| 2400 | perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | ||
| 2401 | |||
| 2402 | ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | ||
| 2403 | specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | ||
| 2404 | region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | ||
| 2405 | further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | ||
| 2406 | command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | ||
| 2407 | within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | ||
| 2408 | are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | ||
| 2409 | region. | ||
| 2410 | |||
| 2411 | In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | ||
| 2412 | selective undo. | ||
| 2413 | |||
| 2414 | ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | ||
| 2415 | unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | ||
| 2416 | buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | ||
| 2417 | effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | ||
| 2418 | Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | ||
| 2419 | |||
| 2420 | The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | ||
| 2421 | though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | ||
| 2422 | -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | ||
| 2423 | load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | ||
| 2424 | |||
| 2425 | ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | ||
| 2426 | no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | ||
| 2427 | enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | ||
| 2428 | something that most users not do. | ||
| 2429 | |||
| 2430 | ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | ||
| 2431 | operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | ||
| 2432 | The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | ||
| 2433 | applications. | ||
| 2434 | |||
| 2435 | C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | ||
| 2436 | pasting operations. | ||
| 2437 | |||
| 2438 | ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | ||
| 2439 | setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | ||
| 2440 | like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | ||
| 2441 | printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | ||
| 2442 | `ps-printer-name'. | ||
| 2443 | |||
| 2444 | ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | ||
| 2445 | minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | ||
| 2446 | any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | ||
| 2447 | except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | ||
| 2448 | incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | ||
| 2449 | hits a new word. | ||
| 2450 | |||
| 2451 | Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | ||
| 2452 | Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | ||
| 2453 | to be confused by TeX commands. | ||
| 2454 | |||
| 2455 | You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | ||
| 2456 | correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | ||
| 2457 | clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | ||
| 2458 | of various alternative replacements and actions. | ||
| 2459 | |||
| 2460 | Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | ||
| 2461 | the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | ||
| 2462 | corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | ||
| 2463 | alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | ||
| 2464 | flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | ||
| 2465 | |||
| 2466 | Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | ||
| 2467 | flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | ||
| 2468 | |||
| 2469 | ** Changes in input method usage. | ||
| 2470 | |||
| 2471 | Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | ||
| 2472 | the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | ||
| 2473 | respectively. | ||
| 2474 | |||
| 2475 | You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | ||
| 2476 | |||
| 2477 | If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | ||
| 2478 | of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | ||
| 2479 | |||
| 2480 | The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | ||
| 2481 | that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | ||
| 2482 | |||
| 2483 | If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | ||
| 2484 | |||
| 2485 | If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | ||
| 2486 | |||
| 2487 | If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | ||
| 2488 | when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | ||
| 2489 | |||
| 2490 | If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | ||
| 2491 | given in the following case: | ||
| 2492 | o When you are using a complex input method. | ||
| 2493 | o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | ||
| 2494 | |||
| 2495 | If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | ||
| 2496 | input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | ||
| 2497 | and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | ||
| 2498 | setting it to t is helpful. | ||
| 2499 | |||
| 2500 | The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | ||
| 2501 | |||
| 2502 | In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | ||
| 2503 | keys: | ||
| 2504 | Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | ||
| 2505 | C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | ||
| 2506 | F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | ||
| 2507 | These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | ||
| 2508 | environment. | ||
| 2509 | |||
| 2510 | ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | ||
| 2511 | names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | ||
| 2512 | minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | ||
| 2513 | get | ||
| 2514 | |||
| 2515 | /usr/foo//etc/passwd | ||
| 2516 | |||
| 2517 | which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | ||
| 2518 | |||
| 2519 | Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | ||
| 2520 | Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | ||
| 2521 | |||
| 2522 | ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | ||
| 2523 | at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | ||
| 2524 | its owner and group. | ||
| 2525 | |||
| 2526 | ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | ||
| 2527 | Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | ||
| 2528 | |||
| 2529 | ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | ||
| 2530 | contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | ||
| 2531 | |||
| 2532 | ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | ||
| 2533 | which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | ||
| 2534 | in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | ||
| 2535 | by the left edge of the rectangle. | ||
| 2536 | |||
| 2537 | ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | ||
| 2538 | increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | ||
| 2539 | C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | ||
| 2540 | for writing keyboard macros. | ||
| 2541 | |||
| 2542 | ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | ||
| 2543 | files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | ||
| 2544 | frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | ||
| 2545 | the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | ||
| 2546 | additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | ||
| 2547 | info. | ||
| 2548 | |||
| 2549 | ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | ||
| 2550 | |||
| 2551 | ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | ||
| 2552 | query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | ||
| 2553 | contents only. | ||
| 2554 | |||
| 2555 | ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | ||
| 2556 | confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | ||
| 2557 | the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | ||
| 2558 | says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | ||
| 2559 | |||
| 2560 | ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | ||
| 2561 | non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | ||
| 2562 | literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | ||
| 2563 | |||
| 2564 | ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | ||
| 2565 | now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | ||
| 2566 | Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | ||
| 2567 | inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | ||
| 2568 | |||
| 2569 | ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | ||
| 2570 | failure if the command produces no output. | ||
| 2571 | |||
| 2572 | ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | ||
| 2573 | manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | ||
| 2574 | the mouse. | ||
| 2575 | |||
| 2576 | ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | ||
| 2577 | mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | ||
| 2578 | function and variable names. | ||
| 2579 | |||
| 2580 | ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | ||
| 2581 | reading specific files. This has higher priority than | ||
| 2582 | file-coding-system-alist. | ||
| 2583 | |||
| 2584 | ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | ||
| 2585 | t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | ||
| 2586 | converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | ||
| 2587 | the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | ||
| 2588 | according to the current fontset. | ||
| 2589 | |||
| 2590 | ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | ||
| 2591 | |||
| 2592 | The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | ||
| 2593 | that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | ||
| 2594 | nonascii-insert-offset. | ||
| 2595 | |||
| 2596 | For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | ||
| 2597 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | ||
| 2598 | nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | ||
| 2599 | characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | ||
| 2600 | |||
| 2601 | ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | ||
| 2602 | an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | ||
| 2603 | |||
| 2604 | ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | ||
| 2605 | letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | ||
| 2606 | |||
| 2607 | ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | ||
| 2608 | are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | ||
| 2609 | command keys. | ||
| 2610 | |||
| 2611 | ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | ||
| 2612 | user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | ||
| 2613 | |||
| 2614 | Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | ||
| 2615 | user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | ||
| 2616 | all variables that have documentation. | ||
| 2617 | |||
| 2618 | ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | ||
| 2619 | shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | ||
| 2620 | that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | ||
| 2621 | minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | ||
| 2622 | it should show; the default is 20. | ||
| 2623 | |||
| 2624 | Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | ||
| 2625 | the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | ||
| 2626 | of your input. | ||
| 2627 | |||
| 2628 | ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | ||
| 2629 | all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | ||
| 2630 | recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | ||
| 2631 | argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | ||
| 2632 | the customizable options which were changed since that version. | ||
| 2633 | Newly added options are included as well. | ||
| 2634 | |||
| 2635 | If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | ||
| 2636 | then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | ||
| 2637 | for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | ||
| 2638 | |||
| 2639 | This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | ||
| 2640 | Customize menu. | ||
| 2641 | |||
| 2642 | ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | ||
| 2643 | the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | ||
| 2644 | |||
| 2645 | ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | ||
| 2646 | buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | ||
| 2647 | invoked. | ||
| 2648 | |||
| 2649 | ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | ||
| 2650 | that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | ||
| 2651 | The default is 1. | ||
| 2652 | |||
| 2653 | ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | ||
| 2654 | syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | ||
| 2655 | new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | ||
| 2656 | (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | ||
| 2657 | sensibly. | ||
| 2658 | |||
| 2659 | ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | ||
| 2660 | |||
| 2661 | ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | ||
| 2662 | value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | ||
| 2663 | two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | ||
| 2664 | |||
| 2665 | ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | ||
| 2666 | reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | ||
| 2667 | for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | ||
| 2668 | every night. | ||
| 2669 | |||
| 2670 | ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | ||
| 2671 | the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | ||
| 2672 | |||
| 2673 | ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | ||
| 2674 | read and post multi-lingual articles. | ||
| 2675 | |||
| 2676 | ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | ||
| 2677 | doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | ||
| 2678 | be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | ||
| 2679 | outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | ||
| 2680 | the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | ||
| 2681 | made invisible again. | ||
| 2682 | |||
| 2683 | ** Mail reading and sending changes | ||
| 2684 | |||
| 2685 | *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | ||
| 2686 | the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | ||
| 2687 | changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | ||
| 2688 | toggle. | ||
| 2689 | |||
| 2690 | *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | ||
| 2691 | now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | ||
| 2692 | summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | ||
| 2693 | the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | ||
| 2694 | rmail-default-body-file. | ||
| 2695 | |||
| 2696 | *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | ||
| 2697 | longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | ||
| 2698 | handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | ||
| 2699 | |||
| 2700 | *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | ||
| 2701 | it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | ||
| 2702 | is evaluated to insert the signature. | ||
| 2703 | |||
| 2704 | *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | ||
| 2705 | outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | ||
| 2706 | handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | ||
| 2707 | putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | ||
| 2708 | transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | ||
| 2709 | especially interested in trying feedmail. | ||
| 2710 | |||
| 2711 | feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | ||
| 2712 | feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | ||
| 2713 | provided by feedmail are: | ||
| 2714 | |||
| 2715 | **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | ||
| 2716 | stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | ||
| 2717 | there is also a queue for draft messages | ||
| 2718 | |||
| 2719 | **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | ||
| 2720 | be prompted for confirmation | ||
| 2721 | |||
| 2722 | **** does smart filling of address headers | ||
| 2723 | |||
| 2724 | **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | ||
| 2725 | the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | ||
| 2726 | can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | ||
| 2727 | |||
| 2728 | **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | ||
| 2729 | the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | ||
| 2730 | /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | ||
| 2731 | function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | ||
| 2732 | |||
| 2733 | ** Dired changes | ||
| 2734 | |||
| 2735 | *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | ||
| 2736 | files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | ||
| 2737 | |||
| 2738 | *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | ||
| 2739 | run Dired on the directory name at point. | ||
| 2740 | |||
| 2741 | *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | ||
| 2742 | files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | ||
| 2743 | for a specified regexp. | ||
| 2744 | |||
| 2745 | ** VC Changes | ||
| 2746 | |||
| 2747 | *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | ||
| 2748 | conveniently. | ||
| 2749 | |||
| 2750 | *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | ||
| 2751 | faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | ||
| 2752 | Dired. | ||
| 2753 | |||
| 2754 | VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | ||
| 2755 | directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | ||
| 2756 | listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | ||
| 2757 | currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | ||
| 2758 | |||
| 2759 | You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | ||
| 2760 | then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | ||
| 2761 | vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | ||
| 2762 | control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | ||
| 2763 | on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | ||
| 2764 | |||
| 2765 | All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | ||
| 2766 | is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | ||
| 2767 | `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | ||
| 2768 | the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | ||
| 2769 | `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | ||
| 2770 | |||
| 2771 | The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | ||
| 2772 | toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | ||
| 2773 | VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | ||
| 2774 | `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | ||
| 2775 | |||
| 2776 | Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | ||
| 2777 | ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | ||
| 2778 | command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | ||
| 2779 | |||
| 2780 | *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | ||
| 2781 | file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | ||
| 2782 | session to resolve them. | ||
| 2783 | |||
| 2784 | Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | ||
| 2785 | resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | ||
| 2786 | contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | ||
| 2787 | uses as well). | ||
| 2788 | |||
| 2789 | *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | ||
| 2790 | command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | ||
| 2791 | you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | ||
| 2792 | either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | ||
| 2793 | branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | ||
| 2794 | If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | ||
| 2795 | using ediff. | ||
| 2796 | |||
| 2797 | ** Changes in Font Lock | ||
| 2798 | |||
| 2799 | *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | ||
| 2800 | are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | ||
| 2801 | use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | ||
| 2802 | unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | ||
| 2803 | compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | ||
| 2804 | |||
| 2805 | ** Frame name display changes | ||
| 2806 | |||
| 2807 | *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | ||
| 2808 | frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | ||
| 2809 | raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | ||
| 2810 | when many frames are invisible or iconified. | ||
| 2811 | |||
| 2812 | *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | ||
| 2813 | frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | ||
| 2814 | menu. | ||
| 2815 | |||
| 2816 | ** Comint (subshell) changes | ||
| 2817 | |||
| 2818 | *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | ||
| 2819 | subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | ||
| 2820 | with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | ||
| 2821 | |||
| 2822 | *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | ||
| 2823 | |||
| 2824 | C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | ||
| 2825 | that is, the line after the last line you got. | ||
| 2826 | You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | ||
| 2827 | |||
| 2828 | C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | ||
| 2829 | send the current line together with the following line, when you send | ||
| 2830 | the following line. | ||
| 2831 | |||
| 2832 | C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | ||
| 2833 | which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | ||
| 2834 | previously sent input. | ||
| 2835 | |||
| 2836 | C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | ||
| 2837 | it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | ||
| 2838 | as the search string. | ||
| 2839 | |||
| 2840 | *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | ||
| 2841 | automatically in compilation-mode windows. | ||
| 2842 | |||
| 2843 | ** C mode changes | ||
| 2844 | |||
| 2845 | *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | ||
| 2846 | and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | ||
| 2847 | assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | ||
| 2848 | definition. | ||
| 2849 | |||
| 2850 | *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | ||
| 2851 | (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | ||
| 2852 | Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | ||
| 2853 | style is still the default however. | ||
| 2854 | |||
| 2855 | *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | ||
| 2856 | |||
| 2857 | *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | ||
| 2858 | are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | ||
| 2859 | them. They do not have key bindings by default. | ||
| 2860 | |||
| 2861 | *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | ||
| 2862 | and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | ||
| 2863 | |||
| 2864 | *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | ||
| 2865 | namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | ||
| 2866 | |||
| 2867 | *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | ||
| 2868 | makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | ||
| 2869 | |||
| 2870 | *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | ||
| 2871 | c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | ||
| 2872 | |||
| 2873 | *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | ||
| 2874 | should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | ||
| 2875 | package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | ||
| 2876 | variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | ||
| 2877 | |||
| 2878 | ** Changes to hippie-expand. | ||
| 2879 | |||
| 2880 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | ||
| 2881 | non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | ||
| 2882 | which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | ||
| 2883 | |||
| 2884 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | ||
| 2885 | non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | ||
| 2886 | expanding dynamically. | ||
| 2887 | |||
| 2888 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | ||
| 2889 | non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | ||
| 2890 | |||
| 2891 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | ||
| 2892 | non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | ||
| 2893 | this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | ||
| 2894 | expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | ||
| 2895 | |||
| 2896 | *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | ||
| 2897 | |||
| 2898 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | ||
| 2899 | |||
| 2900 | *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | ||
| 2901 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | ||
| 2902 | automatic key generation. This replaces variable | ||
| 2903 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | ||
| 2904 | against the first word in the title. | ||
| 2905 | |||
| 2906 | *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | ||
| 2907 | capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | ||
| 2908 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | ||
| 2909 | lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | ||
| 2910 | lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | ||
| 2911 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | ||
| 2912 | |||
| 2913 | *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | ||
| 2914 | generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | ||
| 2915 | replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | ||
| 2916 | bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | ||
| 2917 | |||
| 2918 | ** Changes in vcursor.el. | ||
| 2919 | |||
| 2920 | *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | ||
| 2921 | and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | ||
| 2922 | variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | ||
| 2923 | entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | ||
| 2924 | `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | ||
| 2925 | in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | ||
| 2926 | |||
| 2927 | *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | ||
| 2928 | Editing group once the package is loaded. | ||
| 2929 | |||
| 2930 | *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | ||
| 2931 | generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | ||
| 2932 | vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. | ||
| 2933 | |||
| 2934 | *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | ||
| 2935 | vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | ||
| 2936 | |||
| 2937 | ** Ispell changes. | ||
| 2938 | |||
| 2939 | *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | ||
| 2940 | buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | ||
| 2941 | are identified by syntax tables in effect. | ||
| 2942 | |||
| 2943 | *** Generic region skipping implemented. | ||
| 2944 | A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | ||
| 2945 | and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | ||
| 2946 | defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | ||
| 2947 | include: | ||
| 2948 | |||
| 2949 | o URLs are automatically skipped | ||
| 2950 | o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | ||
| 2951 | |||
| 2952 | *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | ||
| 2953 | |||
| 2954 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | ||
| 2955 | |||
| 2956 | RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | ||
| 2957 | large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | ||
| 2958 | re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | ||
| 2959 | section `Optimizations' in the manual. | ||
| 2960 | |||
| 2961 | *** New recursive parser. | ||
| 2962 | |||
| 2963 | The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | ||
| 2964 | entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | ||
| 2965 | recursive parser scans the individual files. | ||
| 2966 | |||
| 2967 | *** Parsing only part of a document. | ||
| 2968 | |||
| 2969 | Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | ||
| 2970 | partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | ||
| 2971 | the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | ||
| 2972 | |||
| 2973 | (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | ||
| 2974 | |||
| 2975 | *** Storing parsing information in a file. | ||
| 2976 | |||
| 2977 | This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | ||
| 2978 | |||
| 2979 | (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | ||
| 2980 | |||
| 2981 | *** Using multiple selection buffers | ||
| 2982 | |||
| 2983 | If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | ||
| 2984 | for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | ||
| 2985 | |||
| 2986 | (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | ||
| 2987 | |||
| 2988 | *** References to external documents. | ||
| 2989 | |||
| 2990 | The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | ||
| 2991 | documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | ||
| 2992 | documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | ||
| 2993 | macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | ||
| 2994 | RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | ||
| 2995 | the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | ||
| 2996 | The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | ||
| 2997 | |||
| 2998 | *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | ||
| 2999 | |||
| 3000 | The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | ||
| 3001 | and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | ||
| 3002 | |||
| 3003 | Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | ||
| 3004 | the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | ||
| 3005 | |||
| 3006 | *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | ||
| 3007 | |||
| 3008 | The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | ||
| 3009 | buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | ||
| 3010 | |||
| 3011 | *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | ||
| 3012 | |||
| 3013 | The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | ||
| 3014 | contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | ||
| 3015 | `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | ||
| 3016 | have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | ||
| 3017 | enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | ||
| 3018 | at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | ||
| 3019 | more. | ||
| 3020 | |||
| 3021 | *** Support for the varioref package | ||
| 3022 | |||
| 3023 | The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | ||
| 3024 | |||
| 3025 | *** New hooks | ||
| 3026 | |||
| 3027 | Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | ||
| 3028 | and citations are created. These hooks are | ||
| 3029 | `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | ||
| 3030 | `reftex-format-cite-function'. | ||
| 3031 | |||
| 3032 | *** Citations outside LaTeX | ||
| 3033 | |||
| 3034 | The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | ||
| 3035 | a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | ||
| 3036 | |||
| 3037 | *** Short context is no longer fontified. | ||
| 3038 | |||
| 3039 | The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | ||
| 3040 | fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | ||
| 3041 | fontified, use | ||
| 3042 | |||
| 3043 | (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | ||
| 3044 | |||
| 3045 | ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | ||
| 3046 | With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | ||
| 3047 | the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | ||
| 3048 | directories that contain the same file name. | ||
| 3049 | |||
| 3050 | Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | ||
| 3051 | Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | ||
| 3052 | file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | ||
| 3053 | Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | ||
| 3054 | have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | ||
| 3055 | names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | ||
| 3056 | directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | ||
| 3057 | directory. | ||
| 3058 | |||
| 3059 | ** New modes and packages | ||
| 3060 | |||
| 3061 | *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | ||
| 3062 | It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | ||
| 3063 | it, but some do not. | ||
| 3064 | |||
| 3065 | *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | ||
| 3066 | code. | ||
| 3067 | |||
| 3068 | *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | ||
| 3069 | current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | ||
| 3070 | around in a buffer. | ||
| 3071 | |||
| 3072 | Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | ||
| 3073 | |||
| 3074 | *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | ||
| 3075 | uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | ||
| 3076 | be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | ||
| 3077 | established system of notation similar to Chess. | ||
| 3078 | |||
| 3079 | *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | ||
| 3080 | documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | ||
| 3081 | guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | ||
| 3082 | |||
| 3083 | *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | ||
| 3084 | available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | ||
| 3085 | system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | ||
| 3086 | simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | ||
| 3087 | functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | ||
| 3088 | the like. | ||
| 3089 | |||
| 3090 | *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | ||
| 3091 | identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | ||
| 3092 | |||
| 3093 | *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | ||
| 3094 | within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | ||
| 3095 | used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | ||
| 3096 | the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | ||
| 3097 | |||
| 3098 | *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | ||
| 3099 | |||
| 3100 | apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | ||
| 3101 | samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | ||
| 3102 | fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | ||
| 3103 | x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | ||
| 3104 | hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | ||
| 3105 | mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | ||
| 3106 | javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | ||
| 3107 | vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | ||
| 3108 | java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | ||
| 3109 | java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | ||
| 3110 | mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | ||
| 3111 | |||
| 3112 | Platform-specific modes: | ||
| 3113 | |||
| 3114 | prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | ||
| 3115 | pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | ||
| 3116 | alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | ||
| 3117 | inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | ||
| 3118 | ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | ||
| 3119 | reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | ||
| 3120 | bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | ||
| 3121 | rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | ||
| 3122 | rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | ||
| 3123 | |||
| 3124 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | ||
| 3125 | |||
| 3126 | ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | ||
| 3127 | use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | ||
| 3128 | That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | ||
| 3129 | Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | ||
| 3130 | |||
| 3131 | Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | ||
| 3132 | you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | ||
| 3133 | consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | ||
| 3134 | |||
| 3135 | ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | ||
| 3136 | and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | ||
| 3137 | specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | ||
| 3138 | searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | ||
| 3139 | |||
| 3140 | ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | ||
| 3141 | multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | ||
| 3142 | character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | ||
| 3143 | environment. | ||
| 3144 | |||
| 3145 | ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | ||
| 3146 | take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | ||
| 3147 | string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | ||
| 3148 | current input method for reading this one event. | ||
| 3149 | |||
| 3150 | ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | ||
| 3151 | now control whether to output certain characters as | ||
| 3152 | backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | ||
| 3153 | non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | ||
| 3154 | characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | ||
| 3155 | in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | ||
| 3156 | |||
| 3157 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | ||
| 3158 | |||
| 3159 | ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | ||
| 3160 | of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | ||
| 3161 | |||
| 3162 | ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | ||
| 3163 | in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | ||
| 3164 | always increases point by 1. | ||
| 3165 | |||
| 3166 | The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | ||
| 3167 | considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | ||
| 3168 | |||
| 3169 | See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | ||
| 3170 | |||
| 3171 | ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | ||
| 3172 | Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | ||
| 3173 | default value changed. For example, | ||
| 3174 | |||
| 3175 | (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | ||
| 3176 | :type 'integer | ||
| 3177 | :group 'foo | ||
| 3178 | :version "20.3") | ||
| 3179 | |||
| 3180 | (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | ||
| 3181 | :version "20.3") | ||
| 3182 | |||
| 3183 | If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | ||
| 3184 | default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | ||
| 3185 | is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | ||
| 3186 | `:version' in the top level group. | ||
| 3187 | |||
| 3188 | This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | ||
| 3189 | |||
| 3190 | ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | ||
| 3191 | starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | ||
| 3192 | |||
| 3193 | However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | ||
| 3194 | symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | ||
| 3195 | support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | ||
| 3196 | to themselves. | ||
| 3197 | |||
| 3198 | If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | ||
| 3199 | this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | ||
| 3200 | values whatever. | ||
| 3201 | |||
| 3202 | ** There is a new debugger command, R. | ||
| 3203 | It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | ||
| 3204 | in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | ||
| 3205 | |||
| 3206 | ** Frame-local variables. | ||
| 3207 | |||
| 3208 | You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | ||
| 3209 | the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | ||
| 3210 | local bindings for that variable. | ||
| 3211 | |||
| 3212 | These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | ||
| 3213 | frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | ||
| 3214 | modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | ||
| 3215 | parameter name. | ||
| 3216 | |||
| 3217 | Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | ||
| 3218 | Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | ||
| 3219 | active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | ||
| 3220 | that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | ||
| 3221 | |||
| 3222 | It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | ||
| 3223 | clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | ||
| 3224 | very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | ||
| 3225 | through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | ||
| 3226 | |||
| 3227 | ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | ||
| 3228 | "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | ||
| 3229 | evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | ||
| 3230 | makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | ||
| 3231 | See the documentation in sregex.el. | ||
| 3232 | |||
| 3233 | ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | ||
| 3234 | is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | ||
| 3235 | parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | ||
| 3236 | The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | ||
| 3237 | |||
| 3238 | ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | ||
| 3239 | If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | ||
| 3240 | |||
| 3241 | ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | ||
| 3242 | known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | ||
| 3243 | define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | ||
| 3244 | |||
| 3245 | ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | ||
| 3246 | when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | ||
| 3247 | it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | ||
| 3248 | history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | ||
| 3249 | |||
| 3250 | The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | ||
| 3251 | return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | ||
| 3252 | empty input. | ||
| 3253 | |||
| 3254 | ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | ||
| 3255 | for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | ||
| 3256 | `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | ||
| 3257 | Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | ||
| 3258 | `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | ||
| 3259 | |||
| 3260 | ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | ||
| 3261 | echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | ||
| 3262 | a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | ||
| 3263 | default password to use if the user enters nothing. | ||
| 3264 | |||
| 3265 | ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | ||
| 3266 | specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | ||
| 3267 | function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | ||
| 3268 | place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | ||
| 3269 | non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | ||
| 3270 | |||
| 3271 | ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | ||
| 3272 | If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | ||
| 3273 | up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | ||
| 3274 | end of the window, even if this requires computation. | ||
| 3275 | |||
| 3276 | ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | ||
| 3277 | which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | ||
| 3278 | If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | ||
| 3279 | |||
| 3280 | ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | ||
| 3281 | holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | ||
| 3282 | was directed to display this buffer. | ||
| 3283 | |||
| 3284 | ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | ||
| 3285 | with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | ||
| 3286 | describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | ||
| 3287 | other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | ||
| 3288 | set-window-configuration. | ||
| 3289 | |||
| 3290 | ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | ||
| 3291 | window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | ||
| 3292 | positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | ||
| 3293 | windows and the choice of buffers to display. | ||
| 3294 | |||
| 3295 | ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | ||
| 3296 | override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | ||
| 3297 | look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | ||
| 3298 | |||
| 3299 | If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | ||
| 3300 | non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | ||
| 3301 | map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | ||
| 3302 | |||
| 3303 | minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | ||
| 3304 | and it is meant to be set by major modes. | ||
| 3305 | |||
| 3306 | ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | ||
| 3307 | except that it discards all text properties from the result. | ||
| 3308 | |||
| 3309 | ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | ||
| 3310 | USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | ||
| 3311 | floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | ||
| 3312 | |||
| 3313 | ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | ||
| 3314 | to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | ||
| 3315 | in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | ||
| 3316 | it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | ||
| 3317 | |||
| 3318 | ** Menu changes | ||
| 3319 | |||
| 3320 | *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | ||
| 3321 | keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | ||
| 3322 | better supported. | ||
| 3323 | |||
| 3324 | The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | ||
| 3325 | a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | ||
| 3326 | you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | ||
| 3327 | can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | ||
| 3328 | then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | ||
| 3329 | |||
| 3330 | *** A new format for menu items is supported. | ||
| 3331 | |||
| 3332 | In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | ||
| 3333 | (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | ||
| 3334 | defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | ||
| 3335 | starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | ||
| 3336 | |||
| 3337 | The format is: | ||
| 3338 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | ||
| 3339 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | ||
| 3340 | where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | ||
| 3341 | string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | ||
| 3342 | The supported properties include | ||
| 3343 | |||
| 3344 | :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | ||
| 3345 | item is enabled. | ||
| 3346 | :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | ||
| 3347 | item should appear in the menu. | ||
| 3348 | :filter FILTER-FN | ||
| 3349 | FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | ||
| 3350 | which will be REAL-BINDING. | ||
| 3351 | It should return a binding to use instead. | ||
| 3352 | :keys DESCRIPTION | ||
| 3353 | DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | ||
| 3354 | binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | ||
| 3355 | `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | ||
| 3356 | :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | ||
| 3357 | KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | ||
| 3358 | keyboard binding. | ||
| 3359 | :key-sequence nil | ||
| 3360 | This means that the command normally has no | ||
| 3361 | keyboard equivalent. | ||
| 3362 | :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | ||
| 3363 | :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | ||
| 3364 | TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | ||
| 3365 | SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | ||
| 3366 | value says whether this button is currently selected. | ||
| 3367 | |||
| 3368 | Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | ||
| 3369 | Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | ||
| 3370 | |||
| 3371 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | ||
| 3372 | |||
| 3373 | ** New event types | ||
| 3374 | |||
| 3375 | *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | ||
| 3376 | mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | ||
| 3377 | corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | ||
| 3378 | which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | ||
| 3379 | |||
| 3380 | (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | ||
| 3381 | |||
| 3382 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | ||
| 3383 | same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | ||
| 3384 | indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | ||
| 3385 | negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | ||
| 3386 | the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | ||
| 3387 | forward, away from the user. | ||
| 3388 | |||
| 3389 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | ||
| 3390 | |||
| 3391 | *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | ||
| 3392 | files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | ||
| 3393 | and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | ||
| 3394 | filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | ||
| 3395 | loaded into Emacs. The format is: | ||
| 3396 | |||
| 3397 | (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | ||
| 3398 | |||
| 3399 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | ||
| 3400 | same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | ||
| 3401 | that were dragged and dropped. | ||
| 3402 | |||
| 3403 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | ||
| 3404 | |||
| 3405 | ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | ||
| 3406 | |||
| 3407 | *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | ||
| 3408 | any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | ||
| 3409 | to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | ||
| 3410 | |||
| 3411 | *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | ||
| 3412 | can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | ||
| 3413 | that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | ||
| 3414 | |||
| 3415 | *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | ||
| 3416 | in Emacs 19 and before. | ||
| 3417 | |||
| 3418 | The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | ||
| 3419 | The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | ||
| 3420 | |||
| 3421 | *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | ||
| 3422 | buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | ||
| 3423 | unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | ||
| 3424 | representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | ||
| 3425 | |||
| 3426 | This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | ||
| 3427 | as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | ||
| 3428 | viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | ||
| 3429 | one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | ||
| 3430 | will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | ||
| 3431 | |||
| 3432 | This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | ||
| 3433 | representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | ||
| 3434 | (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | ||
| 3435 | consistent with the new representation. | ||
| 3436 | |||
| 3437 | *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | ||
| 3438 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | ||
| 3439 | about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | ||
| 3440 | however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | ||
| 3441 | |||
| 3442 | The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | ||
| 3443 | nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | ||
| 3444 | using the table nonascii-translation-table. | ||
| 3445 | |||
| 3446 | *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | ||
| 3447 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | ||
| 3448 | representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | ||
| 3449 | |||
| 3450 | The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | ||
| 3451 | loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | ||
| 3452 | is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | ||
| 3453 | |||
| 3454 | *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | ||
| 3455 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | ||
| 3456 | |||
| 3457 | *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | ||
| 3458 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | ||
| 3459 | |||
| 3460 | *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | ||
| 3461 | portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | ||
| 3462 | so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | ||
| 3463 | You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | ||
| 3464 | |||
| 3465 | *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | ||
| 3466 | it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | ||
| 3467 | |||
| 3468 | *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | ||
| 3469 | convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | ||
| 3470 | buffer or string being searched. | ||
| 3471 | |||
| 3472 | One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | ||
| 3473 | [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | ||
| 3474 | searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | ||
| 3475 | searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | ||
| 3476 | obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | ||
| 3477 | you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | ||
| 3478 | expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | ||
| 3479 | |||
| 3480 | *** Structure of coding system changed. | ||
| 3481 | |||
| 3482 | All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | ||
| 3483 | by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | ||
| 3484 | which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | ||
| 3485 | as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | ||
| 3486 | vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | ||
| 3487 | your own alias name of a coding system by the function | ||
| 3488 | define-coding-system-alias. | ||
| 3489 | |||
| 3490 | The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | ||
| 3491 | the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | ||
| 3492 | access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | ||
| 3493 | pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | ||
| 3494 | character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | ||
| 3495 | safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | ||
| 3496 | 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | ||
| 3497 | `iso-8859-1'. | ||
| 3498 | |||
| 3499 | Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | ||
| 3500 | The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | ||
| 3501 | coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | ||
| 3502 | (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | ||
| 3503 | |||
| 3504 | Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | ||
| 3505 | also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | ||
| 3506 | are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | ||
| 3507 | the other character sets and read it back correctly. | ||
| 3508 | |||
| 3509 | *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | ||
| 3510 | proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | ||
| 3511 | This function requires a user interaction. | ||
| 3512 | |||
| 3513 | *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | ||
| 3514 | find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | ||
| 3515 | select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | ||
| 3516 | systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | ||
| 3517 | a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | ||
| 3518 | select-safe-coding-system. | ||
| 3519 | |||
| 3520 | *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | ||
| 3521 | decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | ||
| 3522 | last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | ||
| 3523 | was done. | ||
| 3524 | |||
| 3525 | *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | ||
| 3526 | used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | ||
| 3527 | coding systems used by some specific language environment. | ||
| 3528 | |||
| 3529 | *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | ||
| 3530 | return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | ||
| 3531 | characters are found, they now return a list of single element | ||
| 3532 | `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | ||
| 3533 | |||
| 3534 | *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | ||
| 3535 | coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | ||
| 3536 | coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | ||
| 3537 | converted. | ||
| 3538 | |||
| 3539 | *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | ||
| 3540 | coding system for communicating with other X clients. | ||
| 3541 | |||
| 3542 | *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | ||
| 3543 | character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | ||
| 3544 | character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | ||
| 3545 | each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | ||
| 3546 | either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | ||
| 3547 | range of characters. | ||
| 3548 | |||
| 3549 | *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | ||
| 3550 | Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | ||
| 3551 | |||
| 3552 | *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | ||
| 3553 | in the current buffer at position POS. | ||
| 3554 | |||
| 3555 | *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | ||
| 3556 | input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | ||
| 3557 | function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | ||
| 3558 | character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | ||
| 3559 | event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | ||
| 3560 | binding input-method-function to nil. | ||
| 3561 | |||
| 3562 | The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | ||
| 3563 | method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | ||
| 3564 | input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | ||
| 3565 | the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | ||
| 3566 | not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | ||
| 3567 | |||
| 3568 | The input method function is not called when reading the second and | ||
| 3569 | subsequent events of a key sequence. | ||
| 3570 | |||
| 3571 | *** You can customize any language environment by using | ||
| 3572 | set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | ||
| 3573 | |||
| 3574 | The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | ||
| 3575 | customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | ||
| 3576 | instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | ||
| 3577 | environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | ||
| 3578 | exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | ||
| 3579 | |||
| 3580 | * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | ||
| 3581 | |||
| 3582 | ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | ||
| 3583 | options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | ||
| 3584 | at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | ||
| 3585 | tree structure. | ||
| 3586 | |||
| 3587 | M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | ||
| 3588 | user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | ||
| 3589 | |||
| 3590 | With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | ||
| 3591 | session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | ||
| 3592 | in your .emacs file.) | ||
| 3593 | |||
| 3594 | ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | ||
| 3595 | You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | ||
| 3596 | |||
| 3597 | ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | ||
| 3598 | This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | ||
| 3599 | |||
| 3600 | ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | ||
| 3601 | immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | ||
| 3602 | kills the region. | ||
| 3603 | |||
| 3604 | The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | ||
| 3605 | delete the character before point, as usual. | ||
| 3606 | |||
| 3607 | ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | ||
| 3608 | on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | ||
| 3609 | by setting search-highlight to nil.) | ||
| 3610 | |||
| 3611 | ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | ||
| 3612 | insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | ||
| 3613 | the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | ||
| 3614 | onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | ||
| 3615 | history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | ||
| 3616 | past.) | ||
| 3617 | |||
| 3618 | ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | ||
| 3619 | This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | ||
| 3620 | in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | ||
| 3621 | TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | ||
| 3622 | makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | ||
| 3623 | |||
| 3624 | As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | ||
| 3625 | and is an alias for it. | ||
| 3626 | |||
| 3627 | If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | ||
| 3628 | use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | ||
| 3629 | |||
| 3630 | ** Scrolling changes | ||
| 3631 | |||
| 3632 | *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | ||
| 3633 | position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | ||
| 3634 | |||
| 3635 | In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | ||
| 3636 | on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | ||
| 3637 | where it started. | ||
| 3638 | |||
| 3639 | *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | ||
| 3640 | move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | ||
| 3641 | screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | ||
| 3642 | does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | ||
| 3643 | |||
| 3644 | *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | ||
| 3645 | top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | ||
| 3646 | comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | ||
| 3647 | recenters the window. | ||
| 3648 | |||
| 3649 | ** International character set support (MULE) | ||
| 3650 | |||
| 3651 | Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | ||
| 3652 | including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | ||
| 3653 | Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | ||
| 3654 | Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | ||
| 3655 | features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | ||
| 3656 | MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | ||
| 3657 | |||
| 3658 | Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | ||
| 3659 | coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | ||
| 3660 | character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | ||
| 3661 | variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | ||
| 3662 | into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | ||
| 3663 | |||
| 3664 | Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | ||
| 3665 | generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | ||
| 3666 | supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | ||
| 3667 | language, to make it possible to type them. | ||
| 3668 | |||
| 3669 | The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | ||
| 3670 | character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | ||
| 3671 | |||
| 3672 | The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | ||
| 3673 | to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | ||
| 3674 | |||
| 3675 | You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | ||
| 3676 | |||
| 3677 | (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | ||
| 3678 | |||
| 3679 | Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | ||
| 3680 | characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | ||
| 3681 | argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | ||
| 3682 | already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | ||
| 3683 | characters for their work until they want to change. | ||
| 3684 | |||
| 3685 | *** Input methods | ||
| 3686 | |||
| 3687 | An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | ||
| 3688 | specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | ||
| 3689 | has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | ||
| 3690 | the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | ||
| 3691 | support several input methods. | ||
| 3692 | |||
| 3693 | The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | ||
| 3694 | another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | ||
| 3695 | work. | ||
| 3696 | |||
| 3697 | A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | ||
| 3698 | characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | ||
| 3699 | composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | ||
| 3700 | consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | ||
| 3701 | sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | ||
| 3702 | letter. | ||
| 3703 | |||
| 3704 | The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | ||
| 3705 | by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | ||
| 3706 | First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | ||
| 3707 | marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | ||
| 3708 | mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | ||
| 3709 | |||
| 3710 | None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | ||
| 3711 | they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | ||
| 3712 | phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | ||
| 3713 | converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | ||
| 3714 | |||
| 3715 | Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | ||
| 3716 | word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | ||
| 3717 | typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | ||
| 3718 | the first guess is wrong. | ||
| 3719 | |||
| 3720 | *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | ||
| 3721 | turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | ||
| 3722 | |||
| 3723 | If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | ||
| 3724 | byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | ||
| 3725 | they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | ||
| 3726 | the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | ||
| 3727 | |||
| 3728 | However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | ||
| 3729 | use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | ||
| 3730 | includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | ||
| 3731 | translate automatically to and from either one. | ||
| 3732 | |||
| 3733 | *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | ||
| 3734 | |||
| 3735 | Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | ||
| 3736 | file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | ||
| 3737 | sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | ||
| 3738 | what you want. | ||
| 3739 | |||
| 3740 | If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | ||
| 3741 | example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | ||
| 3742 | system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | ||
| 3743 | multibyte characters in that buffer. | ||
| 3744 | |||
| 3745 | If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | ||
| 3746 | character conversion as well. | ||
| 3747 | |||
| 3748 | *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | ||
| 3749 | |||
| 3750 | A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | ||
| 3751 | Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | ||
| 3752 | requires using many fonts. | ||
| 3753 | |||
| 3754 | Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | ||
| 3755 | collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | ||
| 3756 | |||
| 3757 | A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | ||
| 3758 | the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | ||
| 3759 | have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | ||
| 3760 | you would use a font. | ||
| 3761 | |||
| 3762 | If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | ||
| 3763 | specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | ||
| 3764 | display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | ||
| 3765 | |||
| 3766 | The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | ||
| 3767 | (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | ||
| 3768 | characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | ||
| 3769 | or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | ||
| 3770 | and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | ||
| 3771 | |||
| 3772 | *** Defining fontsets. | ||
| 3773 | |||
| 3774 | Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | ||
| 3775 | chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | ||
| 3776 | with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | ||
| 3777 | |||
| 3778 | Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | ||
| 3779 | of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | ||
| 3780 | `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | ||
| 3781 | standard fontset are created automatically. | ||
| 3782 | |||
| 3783 | If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | ||
| 3784 | argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | ||
| 3785 | FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | ||
| 3786 | with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | ||
| 3787 | name is `fontset-startup'. | ||
| 3788 | |||
| 3789 | Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | ||
| 3790 | The resource value should have this form: | ||
| 3791 | FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | ||
| 3792 | FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | ||
| 3793 | * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | ||
| 3794 | * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | ||
| 3795 | * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | ||
| 3796 | The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | ||
| 3797 | of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | ||
| 3798 | CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and | ||
| 3799 | FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | ||
| 3800 | |||
| 3801 | Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | ||
| 3802 | last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | ||
| 3803 | You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | ||
| 3804 | |||
| 3805 | For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | ||
| 3806 | font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | ||
| 3807 | following resource, | ||
| 3808 | Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | ||
| 3809 | the font for ASCII is generated as below: | ||
| 3810 | -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | ||
| 3811 | Here is the substitution rule: | ||
| 3812 | Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | ||
| 3813 | defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | ||
| 3814 | the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | ||
| 3815 | sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | ||
| 3816 | (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | ||
| 3817 | |||
| 3818 | The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | ||
| 3819 | fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | ||
| 3820 | that function explicitly to create a fontset. | ||
| 3821 | |||
| 3822 | With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | ||
| 3823 | like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | ||
| 3824 | name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | ||
| 3825 | fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | ||
| 3826 | fontsets. | ||
| 3827 | |||
| 3828 | *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | ||
| 3829 | defaults for a particular choice of language. | ||
| 3830 | |||
| 3831 | Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | ||
| 3832 | method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | ||
| 3833 | visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | ||
| 3834 | already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | ||
| 3835 | language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | ||
| 3836 | system for new files that you create. | ||
| 3837 | |||
| 3838 | It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | ||
| 3839 | set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | ||
| 3840 | whole Emacs session. | ||
| 3841 | |||
| 3842 | For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | ||
| 3843 | chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | ||
| 3844 | with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | ||
| 3845 | |||
| 3846 | *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | ||
| 3847 | specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | ||
| 3848 | specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | ||
| 3849 | the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | ||
| 3850 | coding systems that Emacs supports. | ||
| 3851 | |||
| 3852 | *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | ||
| 3853 | lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | ||
| 3854 | This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | ||
| 3855 | After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | ||
| 3856 | is used for *the immediately following command*. | ||
| 3857 | |||
| 3858 | So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | ||
| 3859 | write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | ||
| 3860 | |||
| 3861 | If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | ||
| 3862 | then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | ||
| 3863 | |||
| 3864 | For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | ||
| 3865 | visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | ||
| 3866 | |||
| 3867 | *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | ||
| 3868 | construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | ||
| 3869 | to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | ||
| 3870 | specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | ||
| 3871 | of the file. | ||
| 3872 | |||
| 3873 | *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | ||
| 3874 | the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | ||
| 3875 | code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | ||
| 3876 | translated into that character code. | ||
| 3877 | |||
| 3878 | This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | ||
| 3879 | various countries to support the languages of those countries. | ||
| 3880 | |||
| 3881 | By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | ||
| 3882 | |||
| 3883 | *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | ||
| 3884 | the coding system for keyboard input. | ||
| 3885 | |||
| 3886 | Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | ||
| 3887 | with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | ||
| 3888 | some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | ||
| 3889 | |||
| 3890 | By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | ||
| 3891 | |||
| 3892 | Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | ||
| 3893 | input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | ||
| 3894 | translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | ||
| 3895 | to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | ||
| 3896 | designed to work with terminals. | ||
| 3897 | |||
| 3898 | *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | ||
| 3899 | specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | ||
| 3900 | This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | ||
| 3901 | has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | ||
| 3902 | translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | ||
| 3903 | in the corresponding buffer. | ||
| 3904 | |||
| 3905 | By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | ||
| 3906 | |||
| 3907 | *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | ||
| 3908 | to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | ||
| 3909 | It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | ||
| 3910 | |||
| 3911 | *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | ||
| 3912 | an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | ||
| 3913 | command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | ||
| 3914 | want to use. | ||
| 3915 | |||
| 3916 | C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | ||
| 3917 | method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | ||
| 3918 | |||
| 3919 | *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | ||
| 3920 | layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | ||
| 3921 | remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | ||
| 3922 | which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | ||
| 3923 | |||
| 3924 | *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | ||
| 3925 | the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | ||
| 3926 | related information. | ||
| 3927 | |||
| 3928 | *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | ||
| 3929 | HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | ||
| 3930 | scripts. | ||
| 3931 | |||
| 3932 | *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | ||
| 3933 | information about the support for a particular language. | ||
| 3934 | You specify the language as an argument. | ||
| 3935 | |||
| 3936 | *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | ||
| 3937 | the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | ||
| 3938 | first dash. | ||
| 3939 | |||
| 3940 | A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | ||
| 3941 | (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | ||
| 3942 | whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | ||
| 3943 | 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | ||
| 3944 | |||
| 3945 | A alternativnyj (Russian) | ||
| 3946 | B big5 (Chinese) | ||
| 3947 | C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | ||
| 3948 | C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | ||
| 3949 | D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | ||
| 3950 | E euc-japan (Japanese) | ||
| 3951 | I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | ||
| 3952 | J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | ||
| 3953 | K euc-korea (Korean) | ||
| 3954 | R koi8 (Russian) | ||
| 3955 | Q tibetan | ||
| 3956 | S shift_jis (Japanese) | ||
| 3957 | T lao | ||
| 3958 | T tis620 (Thai) | ||
| 3959 | V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | ||
| 3960 | i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | ||
| 3961 | k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | ||
| 3962 | v viqr (Vietnamese) | ||
| 3963 | z hz (Chinese) | ||
| 3964 | |||
| 3965 | When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | ||
| 3966 | two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | ||
| 3967 | coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | ||
| 3968 | keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | ||
| 3969 | |||
| 3970 | *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | ||
| 3971 | conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | ||
| 3972 | |||
| 3973 | When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | ||
| 3974 | into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | ||
| 3975 | rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | ||
| 3976 | Rmail files themselves. | ||
| 3977 | |||
| 3978 | *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | ||
| 3979 | conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | ||
| 3980 | |||
| 3981 | Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | ||
| 3982 | for sending mail: | ||
| 3983 | |||
| 3984 | - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | ||
| 3985 | - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | ||
| 3986 | - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | ||
| 3987 | if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | ||
| 3988 | - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | ||
| 3989 | |||
| 3990 | *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | ||
| 3991 | to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | ||
| 3992 | Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | ||
| 3993 | translations. | ||
| 3994 | |||
| 3995 | ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | ||
| 3996 | of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | ||
| 3997 | insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | ||
| 3998 | without any conversion. | ||
| 3999 | |||
| 4000 | ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | ||
| 4001 | You can now specify any number of octal digits. | ||
| 4002 | RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | ||
| 4003 | any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | ||
| 4004 | |||
| 4005 | ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | ||
| 4006 | functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | ||
| 4007 | |||
| 4008 | Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | ||
| 4009 | Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | ||
| 4010 | |||
| 4011 | Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | ||
| 4012 | mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | ||
| 4013 | |||
| 4014 | ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | ||
| 4015 | complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | ||
| 4016 | in the buffer before point. | ||
| 4017 | |||
| 4018 | With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | ||
| 4019 | symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | ||
| 4020 | you are using. | ||
| 4021 | |||
| 4022 | With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | ||
| 4023 | just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | ||
| 4024 | |||
| 4025 | ** File locking works with NFS now. | ||
| 4026 | |||
| 4027 | The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | ||
| 4028 | in the same directory as FILENAME. | ||
| 4029 | |||
| 4030 | This means that collision detection between two different machines now | ||
| 4031 | works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | ||
| 4032 | can become a bottleneck. | ||
| 4033 | |||
| 4034 | The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | ||
| 4035 | does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | ||
| 4036 | create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | ||
| 4037 | file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | ||
| 4038 | rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | ||
| 4039 | so useful that the change is worth while. | ||
| 4040 | |||
| 4041 | When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | ||
| 4042 | are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | ||
| 4043 | collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | ||
| 4044 | tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | ||
| 4045 | |||
| 4046 | ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | ||
| 4047 | it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | ||
| 4048 | show-paren-mode. | ||
| 4049 | |||
| 4050 | ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | ||
| 4051 | selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | ||
| 4052 | delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | ||
| 4053 | |||
| 4054 | ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | ||
| 4055 | within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | ||
| 4056 | complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | ||
| 4057 | |||
| 4058 | ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | ||
| 4059 | it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | ||
| 4060 | set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | ||
| 4061 | |||
| 4062 | ** Changes in View mode. | ||
| 4063 | |||
| 4064 | *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | ||
| 4065 | Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | ||
| 4066 | |||
| 4067 | *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | ||
| 4068 | view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | ||
| 4069 | |||
| 4070 | *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | ||
| 4071 | previous state. | ||
| 4072 | |||
| 4073 | *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | ||
| 4074 | scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | ||
| 4075 | |||
| 4076 | *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | ||
| 4077 | non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | ||
| 4078 | not just the selected window. | ||
| 4079 | |||
| 4080 | *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | ||
| 4081 | read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | ||
| 4082 | turns View mode on or off. | ||
| 4083 | |||
| 4084 | *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | ||
| 4085 | how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | ||
| 4086 | delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | ||
| 4087 | |||
| 4088 | ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | ||
| 4089 | now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | ||
| 4090 | |||
| 4091 | ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | ||
| 4092 | has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | ||
| 4093 | presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | ||
| 4094 | which version to compare with. | ||
| 4095 | |||
| 4096 | ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | ||
| 4097 | blocks if a match is inside the block. | ||
| 4098 | |||
| 4099 | The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | ||
| 4100 | is outside the block. By customizing the variable | ||
| 4101 | isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | ||
| 4102 | shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | ||
| 4103 | |||
| 4104 | By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | ||
| 4105 | of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | ||
| 4106 | blocks, all of them or none. | ||
| 4107 | |||
| 4108 | ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | ||
| 4109 | current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | ||
| 4110 | confirmation first. | ||
| 4111 | |||
| 4112 | ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | ||
| 4113 | now changes the major mode according to that file name. | ||
| 4114 | However, the mode will not be changed if | ||
| 4115 | (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | ||
| 4116 | (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | ||
| 4117 | not suitable for ordinary files, or | ||
| 4118 | (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | ||
| 4119 | |||
| 4120 | This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | ||
| 4121 | |||
| 4122 | However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | ||
| 4123 | these commands do not change the major mode. | ||
| 4124 | |||
| 4125 | ** M-x occur changes. | ||
| 4126 | |||
| 4127 | *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | ||
| 4128 | it performs a case-sensitive search. | ||
| 4129 | |||
| 4130 | *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | ||
| 4131 | if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | ||
| 4132 | using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | ||
| 4133 | |||
| 4134 | ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | ||
| 4135 | in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | ||
| 4136 | window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | ||
| 4137 | that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | ||
| 4138 | buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | ||
| 4139 | |||
| 4140 | ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | ||
| 4141 | after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | ||
| 4142 | appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | ||
| 4143 | come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | ||
| 4144 | |||
| 4145 | ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | ||
| 4146 | selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | ||
| 4147 | buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | ||
| 4148 | |||
| 4149 | ** Outline mode changes. | ||
| 4150 | |||
| 4151 | *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | ||
| 4152 | |||
| 4153 | *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | ||
| 4154 | |||
| 4155 | ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | ||
| 4156 | you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | ||
| 4157 | Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | ||
| 4158 | was already active. | ||
| 4159 | |||
| 4160 | The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | ||
| 4161 | unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | ||
| 4162 | get confused by it. | ||
| 4163 | |||
| 4164 | If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | ||
| 4165 | set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | ||
| 4166 | |||
| 4167 | ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | ||
| 4168 | |||
| 4169 | *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | ||
| 4170 | conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | ||
| 4171 | character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | ||
| 4172 | including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | ||
| 4173 | |||
| 4174 | The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | ||
| 4175 | mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | ||
| 4176 | copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | ||
| 4177 | |||
| 4178 | *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | ||
| 4179 | are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | ||
| 4180 | values. | ||
| 4181 | |||
| 4182 | `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | ||
| 4183 | case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | ||
| 4184 | `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | ||
| 4185 | case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | ||
| 4186 | |||
| 4187 | ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | ||
| 4188 | certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | ||
| 4189 | can be. The default value is 30. | ||
| 4190 | |||
| 4191 | ** Changes in Mail mode. | ||
| 4192 | |||
| 4193 | *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | ||
| 4194 | Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | ||
| 4195 | composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | ||
| 4196 | `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | ||
| 4197 | `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | ||
| 4198 | behavior. | ||
| 4199 | |||
| 4200 | C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | ||
| 4201 | compose-mail-other-frame. | ||
| 4202 | |||
| 4203 | *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | ||
| 4204 | the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | ||
| 4205 | replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | ||
| 4206 | buffer that shows the original message. | ||
| 4207 | |||
| 4208 | *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | ||
| 4209 | with separator lines around the contents. | ||
| 4210 | |||
| 4211 | *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | ||
| 4212 | in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | ||
| 4213 | definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | ||
| 4214 | need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | ||
| 4215 | |||
| 4216 | *** New features in the mail-complete command. | ||
| 4217 | |||
| 4218 | **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | ||
| 4219 | for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | ||
| 4220 | controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | ||
| 4221 | Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | ||
| 4222 | |||
| 4223 | **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | ||
| 4224 | to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | ||
| 4225 | /etc/passwd. | ||
| 4226 | |||
| 4227 | **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | ||
| 4228 | to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | ||
| 4229 | /etc/passwd. | ||
| 4230 | |||
| 4231 | ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | ||
| 4232 | special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | ||
| 4233 | directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | ||
| 4234 | reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | ||
| 4235 | |||
| 4236 | Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | ||
| 4237 | when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | ||
| 4238 | be taken to be magic. | ||
| 4239 | |||
| 4240 | ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | ||
| 4241 | files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | ||
| 4242 | available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | ||
| 4243 | |||
| 4244 | M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | ||
| 4245 | (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | ||
| 4246 | |||
| 4247 | ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | ||
| 4248 | suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | ||
| 4249 | |||
| 4250 | In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | ||
| 4251 | |||
| 4252 | new key dired.el binding old key | ||
| 4253 | ------- ---------------- ------- | ||
| 4254 | * c dired-change-marks c | ||
| 4255 | * m dired-mark m | ||
| 4256 | * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | ||
| 4257 | * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | ||
| 4258 | * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | ||
| 4259 | * u dired-unmark u | ||
| 4260 | * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | ||
| 4261 | * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | ||
| 4262 | * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | ||
| 4263 | * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | ||
| 4264 | * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | ||
| 4265 | * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | ||
| 4266 | |||
| 4267 | ** Rmail changes. | ||
| 4268 | |||
| 4269 | *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | ||
| 4270 | saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | ||
| 4271 | chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | ||
| 4272 | each time you run it. | ||
| 4273 | |||
| 4274 | *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | ||
| 4275 | whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | ||
| 4276 | |||
| 4277 | *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | ||
| 4278 | messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | ||
| 4279 | means to move in the opposite direction. | ||
| 4280 | |||
| 4281 | *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | ||
| 4282 | you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | ||
| 4283 | |||
| 4284 | *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | ||
| 4285 | just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | ||
| 4286 | It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | ||
| 4287 | can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | ||
| 4288 | for output. | ||
| 4289 | |||
| 4290 | ** Gnus changes. | ||
| 4291 | |||
| 4292 | *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | ||
| 4293 | |||
| 4294 | *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | ||
| 4295 | Gnus. | ||
| 4296 | |||
| 4297 | *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | ||
| 4298 | `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | ||
| 4299 | |||
| 4300 | *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | ||
| 4301 | article mode line. | ||
| 4302 | |||
| 4303 | *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | ||
| 4304 | |||
| 4305 | *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | ||
| 4306 | |||
| 4307 | (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | ||
| 4308 | |||
| 4309 | *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | ||
| 4310 | are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | ||
| 4311 | `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | ||
| 4312 | |||
| 4313 | *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | ||
| 4314 | |||
| 4315 | *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | ||
| 4316 | |||
| 4317 | *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | ||
| 4318 | See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | ||
| 4319 | |||
| 4320 | *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | ||
| 4321 | Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | ||
| 4322 | used to pick articles. | ||
| 4323 | |||
| 4324 | *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | ||
| 4325 | another have been added. | ||
| 4326 | |||
| 4327 | `M-x gnus-change-server' | ||
| 4328 | |||
| 4329 | *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | ||
| 4330 | generating lines in buffers. | ||
| 4331 | |||
| 4332 | *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | ||
| 4333 | `M-C-_'. | ||
| 4334 | |||
| 4335 | *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | ||
| 4336 | |||
| 4337 | *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | ||
| 4338 | |||
| 4339 | (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | ||
| 4340 | |||
| 4341 | *** Scores can be decayed. | ||
| 4342 | |||
| 4343 | (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | ||
| 4344 | |||
| 4345 | *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | ||
| 4346 | Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | ||
| 4347 | |||
| 4348 | *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | ||
| 4349 | the native server. | ||
| 4350 | |||
| 4351 | `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | ||
| 4352 | |||
| 4353 | *** A new command for reading collections of documents | ||
| 4354 | (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | ||
| 4355 | |||
| 4356 | *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | ||
| 4357 | |||
| 4358 | *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | ||
| 4359 | even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | ||
| 4360 | |||
| 4361 | *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | ||
| 4362 | (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | ||
| 4363 | |||
| 4364 | Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | ||
| 4365 | a group. | ||
| 4366 | |||
| 4367 | *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | ||
| 4368 | sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | ||
| 4369 | |||
| 4370 | See the commands under the `T S' submap. | ||
| 4371 | |||
| 4372 | *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | ||
| 4373 | |||
| 4374 | See the commands under the `G P' submap. | ||
| 4375 | |||
| 4376 | *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | ||
| 4377 | |||
| 4378 | Use the `Y c' command. | ||
| 4379 | |||
| 4380 | *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | ||
| 4381 | |||
| 4382 | *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | ||
| 4383 | |||
| 4384 | `M-x nnmail-split-history' | ||
| 4385 | |||
| 4386 | *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | ||
| 4387 | from incoming mail before saving the mail. | ||
| 4388 | |||
| 4389 | See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | ||
| 4390 | |||
| 4391 | *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | ||
| 4392 | |||
| 4393 | *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | ||
| 4394 | the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | ||
| 4395 | |||
| 4396 | (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | ||
| 4397 | |||
| 4398 | Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | ||
| 4399 | and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | ||
| 4400 | from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | ||
| 4401 | hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | ||
| 4402 | this issue.) | ||
| 4403 | |||
| 4404 | Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | ||
| 4405 | automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | ||
| 4406 | particular news group. This can be done by: | ||
| 4407 | |||
| 4408 | (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | ||
| 4409 | |||
| 4410 | Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | ||
| 4411 | of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | ||
| 4412 | "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | ||
| 4413 | system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | ||
| 4414 | for reading and posting). | ||
| 4415 | |||
| 4416 | CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | ||
| 4417 | (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | ||
| 4418 | Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | ||
| 4419 | newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | ||
| 4420 | there. | ||
| 4421 | |||
| 4422 | Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | ||
| 4423 | default. Here are some of these default settings: | ||
| 4424 | |||
| 4425 | (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | ||
| 4426 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | ||
| 4427 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | ||
| 4428 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | ||
| 4429 | (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | ||
| 4430 | |||
| 4431 | When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | ||
| 4432 | the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | ||
| 4433 | |||
| 4434 | ** CC mode changes. | ||
| 4435 | |||
| 4436 | *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | ||
| 4437 | code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | ||
| 4438 | values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | ||
| 4439 | this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | ||
| 4440 | Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | ||
| 4441 | loaded. | ||
| 4442 | |||
| 4443 | If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | ||
| 4444 | Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | ||
| 4445 | style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | ||
| 4446 | share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | ||
| 4447 | c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | ||
| 4448 | must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | ||
| 4449 | |||
| 4450 | *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | ||
| 4451 | of the current buffer. | ||
| 4452 | |||
| 4453 | *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | ||
| 4454 | it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | ||
| 4455 | of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | ||
| 4456 | |||
| 4457 | *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | ||
| 4458 | style that the Python developers like. | ||
| 4459 | |||
| 4460 | *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | ||
| 4461 | This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | ||
| 4462 | just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | ||
| 4463 | |||
| 4464 | ** VC Changes [new] | ||
| 4465 | |||
| 4466 | ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | ||
| 4467 | name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | ||
| 4468 | directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | ||
| 4469 | |||
| 4470 | This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | ||
| 4471 | master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | ||
| 4472 | developers. | ||
| 4473 | |||
| 4474 | You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | ||
| 4475 | RET in a buffer visiting that file. | ||
| 4476 | |||
| 4477 | *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | ||
| 4478 | other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | ||
| 4479 | writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | ||
| 4480 | calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | ||
| 4481 | |||
| 4482 | *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | ||
| 4483 | version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | ||
| 4484 | |||
| 4485 | ** Calendar changes. | ||
| 4486 | |||
| 4487 | A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | ||
| 4488 | of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | ||
| 4489 | for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | ||
| 4490 | |||
| 4491 | ** ps-print changes | ||
| 4492 | |||
| 4493 | There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. | ||
| 4494 | |||
| 4495 | *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | ||
| 4496 | |||
| 4497 | The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | ||
| 4498 | formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | ||
| 4499 | `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | ||
| 4500 | `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | ||
| 4501 | It defaults to `letter'. | ||
| 4502 | If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | ||
| 4503 | |||
| 4504 | The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | ||
| 4505 | of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, | ||
| 4506 | non-nil means "landscape" mode. | ||
| 4507 | |||
| 4508 | The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | ||
| 4509 | It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | ||
| 4510 | It defaults to 1. | ||
| 4511 | |||
| 4512 | *** Horizontal layout | ||
| 4513 | |||
| 4514 | The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | ||
| 4515 | `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | ||
| 4516 | All are measured in points. | ||
| 4517 | |||
| 4518 | *** Vertical layout | ||
| 4519 | |||
| 4520 | The vertical layout is determined by the variables | ||
| 4521 | `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | ||
| 4522 | All are measured in points. | ||
| 4523 | |||
| 4524 | *** Headers | ||
| 4525 | |||
| 4526 | If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | ||
| 4527 | `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | ||
| 4528 | margin above the text. | ||
| 4529 | |||
| 4530 | If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy | ||
| 4531 | framing box is printed around the header. | ||
| 4532 | |||
| 4533 | The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | ||
| 4534 | `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | ||
| 4535 | |||
| 4536 | The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', | ||
| 4537 | `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | ||
| 4538 | `ps-header-font-size'. | ||
| 4539 | |||
| 4540 | *** Font managing | ||
| 4541 | |||
| 4542 | The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | ||
| 4543 | used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | ||
| 4544 | `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | ||
| 4545 | elements to this alist. | ||
| 4546 | |||
| 4547 | The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font | ||
| 4548 | for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. | ||
| 4549 | |||
| 4550 | ** hideshow changes. | ||
| 4551 | |||
| 4552 | *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | ||
| 4553 | C++, ; for lisp). | ||
| 4554 | |||
| 4555 | *** Support for java-mode added. | ||
| 4556 | |||
| 4557 | *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | ||
| 4558 | in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | ||
| 4559 | |||
| 4560 | *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at | ||
| 4561 | the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | ||
| 4562 | way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | ||
| 4563 | |||
| 4564 | *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | ||
| 4565 | robust and a lot faster. | ||
| 4566 | |||
| 4567 | *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | ||
| 4568 | |||
| 4569 | *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | ||
| 4570 | to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | ||
| 4571 | documentation for more details. | ||
| 4572 | |||
| 4573 | ** Changes in Enriched mode. | ||
| 4574 | |||
| 4575 | *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | ||
| 4576 | filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | ||
| 4577 | of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | ||
| 4578 | use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | ||
| 4579 | the next time unless the fill-column is different. | ||
| 4580 | |||
| 4581 | *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | ||
| 4582 | distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | ||
| 4583 | as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | ||
| 4584 | as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | ||
| 4585 | |||
| 4586 | ** Font Lock mode | ||
| 4587 | |||
| 4588 | *** Custom support | ||
| 4589 | |||
| 4590 | The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | ||
| 4591 | font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | ||
| 4592 | faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | ||
| 4593 | group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | ||
| 4594 | your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | ||
| 4595 | consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | ||
| 4596 | |||
| 4597 | You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | ||
| 4598 | |||
| 4599 | *** Maximum decoration | ||
| 4600 | |||
| 4601 | Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | ||
| 4602 | default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | ||
| 4603 | of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | ||
| 4604 | supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | ||
| 4605 | to get the old behavior. | ||
| 4606 | |||
| 4607 | *** New support | ||
| 4608 | |||
| 4609 | Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | ||
| 4610 | |||
| 4611 | Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | ||
| 4612 | support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | ||
| 4613 | |||
| 4614 | *** Configurable support | ||
| 4615 | |||
| 4616 | Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | ||
| 4617 | additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | ||
| 4618 | c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | ||
| 4619 | java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | ||
| 4620 | list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | ||
| 4621 | of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | ||
| 4622 | convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | ||
| 4623 | |||
| 4624 | Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | ||
| 4625 | way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | ||
| 4626 | it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | ||
| 4627 | |||
| 4628 | *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | ||
| 4629 | |||
| 4630 | You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | ||
| 4631 | highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | ||
| 4632 | for any mode. | ||
| 4633 | |||
| 4634 | For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | ||
| 4635 | |||
| 4636 | (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | ||
| 4637 | |||
| 4638 | in your ~/.emacs. | ||
| 4639 | |||
| 4640 | *** New faces | ||
| 4641 | |||
| 4642 | Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | ||
| 4643 | font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | ||
| 4644 | distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | ||
| 4645 | to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | ||
| 4646 | |||
| 4647 | *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | ||
| 4648 | |||
| 4649 | The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | ||
| 4650 | cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | ||
| 4651 | same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | ||
| 4652 | |||
| 4653 | *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | ||
| 4654 | |||
| 4655 | The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | ||
| 4656 | according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | ||
| 4657 | the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | ||
| 4658 | non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | ||
| 4659 | refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | ||
| 4660 | the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | ||
| 4661 | Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | ||
| 4662 | |||
| 4663 | This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | ||
| 4664 | For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | ||
| 4665 | this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | ||
| 4666 | refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | ||
| 4667 | containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | ||
| 4668 | the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | ||
| 4669 | |||
| 4670 | As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | ||
| 4671 | |||
| 4672 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | ||
| 4673 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | ||
| 4674 | Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | ||
| 4675 | new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | ||
| 4676 | |||
| 4677 | If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | ||
| 4678 | settings. | ||
| 4679 | |||
| 4680 | ** Ada mode changes. | ||
| 4681 | |||
| 4682 | *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | ||
| 4683 | If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | ||
| 4684 | procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | ||
| 4685 | you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | ||
| 4686 | stubs. | ||
| 4687 | |||
| 4688 | *** There are two new commands: | ||
| 4689 | - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | ||
| 4690 | - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | ||
| 4691 | |||
| 4692 | The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | ||
| 4693 | `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | ||
| 4694 | `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | ||
| 4695 | |||
| 4696 | *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | ||
| 4697 | is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | ||
| 4698 | Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | ||
| 4699 | |||
| 4700 | *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | ||
| 4701 | formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | ||
| 4702 | places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | ||
| 4703 | space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | ||
| 4704 | |||
| 4705 | ** Scheme mode changes. | ||
| 4706 | |||
| 4707 | *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | ||
| 4708 | mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | ||
| 4709 | for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | ||
| 4710 | with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | ||
| 4711 | have any effect. | ||
| 4712 | |||
| 4713 | If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | ||
| 4714 | still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | ||
| 4715 | scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | ||
| 4716 | variables as buffer-local variables. | ||
| 4717 | |||
| 4718 | *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | ||
| 4719 | Use M-x dsssl-mode. | ||
| 4720 | |||
| 4721 | ** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | ||
| 4722 | it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | ||
| 4723 | buffer in Emacs. | ||
| 4724 | |||
| 4725 | ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | ||
| 4726 | constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | ||
| 4727 | (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | ||
| 4728 | |||
| 4729 | ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | ||
| 4730 | which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | ||
| 4731 | the current defun. | ||
| 4732 | |||
| 4733 | ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | ||
| 4734 | following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | ||
| 4735 | |||
| 4736 | ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | ||
| 4737 | and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | ||
| 4738 | necessary). | ||
| 4739 | |||
| 4740 | ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | ||
| 4741 | if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | ||
| 4742 | these register values no longer become completely useless. | ||
| 4743 | If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | ||
| 4744 | asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | ||
| 4745 | it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | ||
| 4746 | |||
| 4747 | ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | ||
| 4748 | example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | ||
| 4749 | be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | ||
| 4750 | you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | ||
| 4751 | |||
| 4752 | You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | ||
| 4753 | variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | ||
| 4754 | file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | ||
| 4755 | revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | ||
| 4756 | only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | ||
| 4757 | |||
| 4758 | ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | ||
| 4759 | since it applies only to the current frame. | ||
| 4760 | |||
| 4761 | ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | ||
| 4762 | file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | ||
| 4763 | and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | ||
| 4764 | |||
| 4765 | This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | ||
| 4766 | multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | ||
| 4767 | variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | ||
| 4768 | tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | ||
| 4769 | instead of just the file you are editing. | ||
| 4770 | |||
| 4771 | ** RefTeX mode | ||
| 4772 | |||
| 4773 | RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | ||
| 4774 | and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | ||
| 4775 | different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | ||
| 4776 | multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | ||
| 4777 | turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | ||
| 4778 | |||
| 4779 | C-c ( reftex-label | ||
| 4780 | Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | ||
| 4781 | knows which kind of label is needed. | ||
| 4782 | |||
| 4783 | C-c ) reftex-reference | ||
| 4784 | Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | ||
| 4785 | label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | ||
| 4786 | |||
| 4787 | C-c [ reftex-citation | ||
| 4788 | Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | ||
| 4789 | database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | ||
| 4790 | |||
| 4791 | C-c & reftex-view-crossref | ||
| 4792 | Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | ||
| 4793 | |||
| 4794 | C-c = reftex-toc | ||
| 4795 | Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | ||
| 4796 | can quickly jump to every section. | ||
| 4797 | |||
| 4798 | Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | ||
| 4799 | commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | ||
| 4800 | Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | ||
| 4801 | reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | ||
| 4802 | C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | ||
| 4803 | |||
| 4804 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | ||
| 4805 | |||
| 4806 | *** Info documentation is now available. | ||
| 4807 | |||
| 4808 | *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | ||
| 4809 | both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | ||
| 4810 | |||
| 4811 | *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | ||
| 4812 | bibtex-user-optional-fields. | ||
| 4813 | |||
| 4814 | *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | ||
| 4815 | (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | ||
| 4816 | |||
| 4817 | *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | ||
| 4818 | entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | ||
| 4819 | appropriate functions. | ||
| 4820 | |||
| 4821 | *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | ||
| 4822 | entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | ||
| 4823 | |||
| 4824 | *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | ||
| 4825 | been cleaned. | ||
| 4826 | |||
| 4827 | *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | ||
| 4828 | bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | ||
| 4829 | |||
| 4830 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | ||
| 4831 | shall be delimited. | ||
| 4832 | |||
| 4833 | *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | ||
| 4834 | bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | ||
| 4835 | bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | ||
| 4836 | |||
| 4837 | *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | ||
| 4838 | field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | ||
| 4839 | prefixed with `ALT'. | ||
| 4840 | |||
| 4841 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | ||
| 4842 | bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | ||
| 4843 | formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | ||
| 4844 | documentation). | ||
| 4845 | |||
| 4846 | *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | ||
| 4847 | documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | ||
| 4848 | for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | ||
| 4849 | |||
| 4850 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | ||
| 4851 | comma should be inserted at end of last field. | ||
| 4852 | |||
| 4853 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | ||
| 4854 | alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | ||
| 4855 | signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | ||
| 4856 | |||
| 4857 | *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | ||
| 4858 | |||
| 4859 | *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | ||
| 4860 | |||
| 4861 | *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | ||
| 4862 | from alien sources. | ||
| 4863 | |||
| 4864 | *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | ||
| 4865 | to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | ||
| 4866 | crossref entries. | ||
| 4867 | |||
| 4868 | *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | ||
| 4869 | region. | ||
| 4870 | |||
| 4871 | *** Added support for imenu. | ||
| 4872 | |||
| 4873 | *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | ||
| 4874 | of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | ||
| 4875 | `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | ||
| 4876 | `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | ||
| 4877 | |||
| 4878 | *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | ||
| 4879 | from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | ||
| 4880 | |||
| 4881 | ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | ||
| 4882 | |||
| 4883 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | ||
| 4884 | functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | ||
| 4885 | Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | ||
| 4886 | as an argument. | ||
| 4887 | |||
| 4888 | When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | ||
| 4889 | and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | ||
| 4890 | |||
| 4891 | ** browse-url changes | ||
| 4892 | |||
| 4893 | *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | ||
| 4894 | Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | ||
| 4895 | (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | ||
| 4896 | non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | ||
| 4897 | customization variables. | ||
| 4898 | |||
| 4899 | *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | ||
| 4900 | |||
| 4901 | *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | ||
| 4902 | lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | ||
| 4903 | (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | ||
| 4904 | |||
| 4905 | ** Changes in Ediff | ||
| 4906 | |||
| 4907 | *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | ||
| 4908 | pops up the Info file for this command. | ||
| 4909 | |||
| 4910 | *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | ||
| 4911 | the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | ||
| 4912 | merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | ||
| 4913 | directories). | ||
| 4914 | |||
| 4915 | *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | ||
| 4916 | and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | ||
| 4917 | files in the same directory. | ||
| 4918 | |||
| 4919 | *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | ||
| 4920 | The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | ||
| 4921 | related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | ||
| 4922 | |||
| 4923 | ** Changes in Viper | ||
| 4924 | |||
| 4925 | *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | ||
| 4926 | *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | ||
| 4927 | instead of vip-. | ||
| 4928 | *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | ||
| 4929 | *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | ||
| 4930 | Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | ||
| 4931 | *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | ||
| 4932 | *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | ||
| 4933 | *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | ||
| 4934 | color when Viper is in insert state. | ||
| 4935 | *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | ||
| 4936 | Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | ||
| 4937 | viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | ||
| 4938 | |||
| 4939 | ** Etags changes. | ||
| 4940 | |||
| 4941 | *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | ||
| 4942 | default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | ||
| 4943 | Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | ||
| 4944 | variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | ||
| 4945 | not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | ||
| 4946 | |||
| 4947 | *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | ||
| 4948 | |||
| 4949 | *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | ||
| 4950 | constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | ||
| 4951 | |||
| 4952 | *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | ||
| 4953 | recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | ||
| 4954 | In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | ||
| 4955 | |||
| 4956 | *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | ||
| 4957 | C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | ||
| 4958 | recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | ||
| 4959 | methods and protocols. | ||
| 4960 | |||
| 4961 | *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | ||
| 4962 | .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | ||
| 4963 | column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | ||
| 4964 | paragraph name. | ||
| 4965 | |||
| 4966 | *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | ||
| 4967 | an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | ||
| 4968 | at least M times and as many as N times. | ||
| 4969 | |||
| 4970 | ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | ||
| 4971 | in files has changed slightly. | ||
| 4972 | |||
| 4973 | With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | ||
| 4974 | time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | ||
| 4975 | This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | ||
| 4976 | with old time-stamp-format values. | ||
| 4977 | |||
| 4978 | In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | ||
| 4979 | (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | ||
| 4980 | This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | ||
| 4981 | reasons. | ||
| 4982 | |||
| 4983 | In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | ||
| 4984 | natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | ||
| 4985 | fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | ||
| 4986 | (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | ||
| 4987 | time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | ||
| 4988 | specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | ||
| 4989 | |||
| 4990 | Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | ||
| 4991 | case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | ||
| 4992 | truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | ||
| 4993 | |||
| 4994 | The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | ||
| 4995 | being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | ||
| 4996 | future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | ||
| 4997 | recommended now will continue to work then. | ||
| 4998 | |||
| 4999 | See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | ||
| 5000 | details. | ||
| 5001 | |||
| 5002 | ** There are some additional major modes: | ||
| 5003 | |||
| 5004 | dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | ||
| 5005 | m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | ||
| 5006 | meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | ||
| 5007 | |||
| 5008 | ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | ||
| 5009 | copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | ||
| 5010 | into Emacs. | ||
| 5011 | |||
| 5012 | ** New Lisp packages include: | ||
| 5013 | |||
| 5014 | *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | ||
| 5015 | |||
| 5016 | *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | ||
| 5017 | be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | ||
| 5018 | |||
| 5019 | *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | ||
| 5020 | |||
| 5021 | *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | ||
| 5022 | in shell buffers. | ||
| 5023 | |||
| 5024 | *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | ||
| 5025 | See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | ||
| 5026 | and `elint-defun'. | ||
| 5027 | |||
| 5028 | *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | ||
| 5029 | meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | ||
| 5030 | ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | ||
| 5031 | strings or comments. | ||
| 5032 | |||
| 5033 | These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | ||
| 5034 | abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | ||
| 5035 | you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | ||
| 5036 | insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | ||
| 5037 | at these points. | ||
| 5038 | |||
| 5039 | *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | ||
| 5040 | can visit them by short forms of their names. | ||
| 5041 | |||
| 5042 | *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | ||
| 5043 | Emacs Lisp function at point. | ||
| 5044 | |||
| 5045 | *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | ||
| 5046 | |||
| 5047 | *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | ||
| 5048 | switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | ||
| 5049 | |||
| 5050 | *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | ||
| 5051 | |||
| 5052 | *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | ||
| 5053 | |||
| 5054 | *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | ||
| 5055 | |||
| 5056 | *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | ||
| 5057 | from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | ||
| 5058 | |||
| 5059 | *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | ||
| 5060 | You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | ||
| 5061 | inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | ||
| 5062 | original place after inserting the copy. | ||
| 5063 | |||
| 5064 | *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | ||
| 5065 | on the buffer. | ||
| 5066 | |||
| 5067 | You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | ||
| 5068 | velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | ||
| 5069 | (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | ||
| 5070 | |||
| 5071 | Enable mouse-drag with: | ||
| 5072 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | ||
| 5073 | -or- | ||
| 5074 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | ||
| 5075 | |||
| 5076 | *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | ||
| 5077 | mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | ||
| 5078 | |||
| 5079 | *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | ||
| 5080 | It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | ||
| 5081 | |||
| 5082 | *** ogonek | ||
| 5083 | |||
| 5084 | The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | ||
| 5085 | Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | ||
| 5086 | platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | ||
| 5087 | TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | ||
| 5088 | ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | ||
| 5089 | prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | ||
| 5090 | instance) and vice versa. | ||
| 5091 | |||
| 5092 | To use this package load it using | ||
| 5093 | M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | ||
| 5094 | Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | ||
| 5095 | M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | ||
| 5096 | M-x ogonek-how -- in English | ||
| 5097 | The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | ||
| 5098 | ways of customization in `.emacs'. | ||
| 5099 | |||
| 5100 | *** Interface to ph. | ||
| 5101 | |||
| 5102 | Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | ||
| 5103 | |||
| 5104 | The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | ||
| 5105 | services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | ||
| 5106 | these servers. | ||
| 5107 | |||
| 5108 | *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | ||
| 5109 | |||
| 5110 | *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | ||
| 5111 | You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | ||
| 5112 | while the real cursor does not move. | ||
| 5113 | |||
| 5114 | *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | ||
| 5115 | for visiting your favorite web sites. | ||
| 5116 | |||
| 5117 | *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | ||
| 5118 | so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | ||
| 5119 | |||
| 5120 | ** movemail change | ||
| 5121 | |||
| 5122 | Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | ||
| 5123 | mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | ||
| 5124 | supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | ||
| 5125 | user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | ||
| 5126 | |||
| 5127 | This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | ||
| 5128 | |||
| 5129 | * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | ||
| 5130 | |||
| 5131 | ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | ||
| 5132 | |||
| 5133 | Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | ||
| 5134 | end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | ||
| 5135 | Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | ||
| 5136 | file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | ||
| 5137 | file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | ||
| 5138 | |||
| 5139 | To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | ||
| 5140 | C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | ||
| 5141 | coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | ||
| 5142 | specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | ||
| 5143 | LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | ||
| 5144 | save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | ||
| 5145 | |||
| 5146 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | ||
| 5147 | |||
| 5148 | ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | ||
| 5149 | Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | ||
| 5150 | vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | ||
| 5151 | Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | ||
| 5152 | |||
| 5153 | ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | ||
| 5154 | to start with w32- instead of win32-. | ||
| 5155 | |||
| 5156 | In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | ||
| 5157 | don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | ||
| 5158 | "win". | ||
| 5159 | |||
| 5160 | ** Basic Lisp changes | ||
| 5161 | |||
| 5162 | *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | ||
| 5163 | evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | ||
| 5164 | |||
| 5165 | *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | ||
| 5166 | be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | ||
| 5167 | or by the user. | ||
| 5168 | |||
| 5169 | The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | ||
| 5170 | |||
| 5171 | *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | ||
| 5172 | |||
| 5173 | (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | ||
| 5174 | (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | ||
| 5175 | |||
| 5176 | *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | ||
| 5177 | usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | ||
| 5178 | its argument. | ||
| 5179 | |||
| 5180 | *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | ||
| 5181 | |||
| 5182 | *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | ||
| 5183 | |||
| 5184 | *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | ||
| 5185 | |||
| 5186 | *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | ||
| 5187 | error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | ||
| 5188 | include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | ||
| 5189 | `format' function. | ||
| 5190 | |||
| 5191 | *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | ||
| 5192 | or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | ||
| 5193 | whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | ||
| 5194 | |||
| 5195 | *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | ||
| 5196 | either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | ||
| 5197 | adding one of these suffixes. | ||
| 5198 | |||
| 5199 | *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | ||
| 5200 | which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | ||
| 5201 | If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | ||
| 5202 | |||
| 5203 | We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | ||
| 5204 | because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | ||
| 5205 | |||
| 5206 | *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | ||
| 5207 | |||
| 5208 | *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | ||
| 5209 | You must load the `cl' library to define it. | ||
| 5210 | |||
| 5211 | *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | ||
| 5212 | conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | ||
| 5213 | |||
| 5214 | (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | ||
| 5215 | |||
| 5216 | BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | ||
| 5217 | BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | ||
| 5218 | |||
| 5219 | *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | ||
| 5220 | choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | ||
| 5221 | restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | ||
| 5222 | works using `save-current-buffer'. | ||
| 5223 | |||
| 5224 | *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | ||
| 5225 | write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | ||
| 5226 | of the last form. | ||
| 5227 | |||
| 5228 | *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | ||
| 5229 | which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | ||
| 5230 | last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | ||
| 5231 | as the last form. | ||
| 5232 | |||
| 5233 | *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | ||
| 5234 | characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | ||
| 5235 | matches. | ||
| 5236 | |||
| 5237 | For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | ||
| 5238 | |||
| 5239 | *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | ||
| 5240 | with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | ||
| 5241 | Then it returns that string. | ||
| 5242 | |||
| 5243 | For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | ||
| 5244 | |||
| 5245 | (with-output-to-string | ||
| 5246 | (princ "The buffer is ") | ||
| 5247 | (princ (buffer-name))) | ||
| 5248 | |||
| 5249 | returns "The buffer is foo". | ||
| 5250 | |||
| 5251 | ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | ||
| 5252 | is non-nil. | ||
| 5253 | |||
| 5254 | These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | ||
| 5255 | buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | ||
| 5256 | characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | ||
| 5257 | |||
| 5258 | *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | ||
| 5259 | a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | ||
| 5260 | |||
| 5261 | Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | ||
| 5262 | character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | ||
| 5263 | Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | ||
| 5264 | position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | ||
| 5265 | characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | ||
| 5266 | (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | ||
| 5267 | |||
| 5268 | ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | ||
| 5269 | Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | ||
| 5270 | non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | ||
| 5271 | characters". | ||
| 5272 | |||
| 5273 | The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | ||
| 5274 | through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | ||
| 5275 | "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | ||
| 5276 | range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | ||
| 5277 | leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | ||
| 5278 | |||
| 5279 | *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | ||
| 5280 | (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | ||
| 5281 | multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | ||
| 5282 | character, which may be more than one buffer position. | ||
| 5283 | |||
| 5284 | This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | ||
| 5285 | always one buffer position, need to be changed. | ||
| 5286 | |||
| 5287 | However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | ||
| 5288 | |||
| 5289 | *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | ||
| 5290 | because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | ||
| 5291 | have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | ||
| 5292 | the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | ||
| 5293 | guaranteed. | ||
| 5294 | |||
| 5295 | *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | ||
| 5296 | between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | ||
| 5297 | character). | ||
| 5298 | |||
| 5299 | When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | ||
| 5300 | |||
| 5301 | 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | ||
| 5302 | 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | ||
| 5303 | 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | ||
| 5304 | 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | ||
| 5305 | 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | ||
| 5306 | |||
| 5307 | *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | ||
| 5308 | |||
| 5309 | *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | ||
| 5310 | `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | ||
| 5311 | more than the number of characters. | ||
| 5312 | |||
| 5313 | You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | ||
| 5314 | it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | ||
| 5315 | \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | ||
| 5316 | is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | ||
| 5317 | follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | ||
| 5318 | newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | ||
| 5319 | |||
| 5320 | *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | ||
| 5321 | and returns a string containing those characters. | ||
| 5322 | |||
| 5323 | *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | ||
| 5324 | (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | ||
| 5325 | counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | ||
| 5326 | character, sref signals an error. | ||
| 5327 | |||
| 5328 | *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | ||
| 5329 | in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | ||
| 5330 | string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | ||
| 5331 | |||
| 5332 | *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | ||
| 5333 | in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | ||
| 5334 | region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | ||
| 5335 | |||
| 5336 | *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | ||
| 5337 | the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | ||
| 5338 | to a vector of the characters in it. | ||
| 5339 | |||
| 5340 | *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | ||
| 5341 | of a string. You call it as follows: | ||
| 5342 | |||
| 5343 | (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | ||
| 5344 | |||
| 5345 | This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | ||
| 5346 | STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | ||
| 5347 | This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | ||
| 5348 | Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | ||
| 5349 | it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | ||
| 5350 | |||
| 5351 | *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | ||
| 5352 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | ||
| 5353 | |||
| 5354 | *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | ||
| 5355 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | ||
| 5356 | |||
| 5357 | *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | ||
| 5358 | to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | ||
| 5359 | not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | ||
| 5360 | which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | ||
| 5361 | |||
| 5362 | (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | ||
| 5363 | |||
| 5364 | This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | ||
| 5365 | |||
| 5366 | The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | ||
| 5367 | If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | ||
| 5368 | are not included in the resulting value. | ||
| 5369 | |||
| 5370 | The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | ||
| 5371 | at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | ||
| 5372 | WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | ||
| 5373 | is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | ||
| 5374 | |||
| 5375 | If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | ||
| 5376 | place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | ||
| 5377 | character extends across that column), then the padding character | ||
| 5378 | PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | ||
| 5379 | string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | ||
| 5380 | column START-COLUMN. | ||
| 5381 | |||
| 5382 | *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | ||
| 5383 | the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | ||
| 5384 | necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | ||
| 5385 | difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | ||
| 5386 | changed text, before the change. | ||
| 5387 | |||
| 5388 | *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | ||
| 5389 | sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | ||
| 5390 | one character set for each script, not for each language. | ||
| 5391 | |||
| 5392 | **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | ||
| 5393 | |||
| 5394 | **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | ||
| 5395 | |||
| 5396 | **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | ||
| 5397 | set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | ||
| 5398 | |||
| 5399 | **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | ||
| 5400 | name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | ||
| 5401 | which identify the character within that character set. | ||
| 5402 | |||
| 5403 | **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | ||
| 5404 | byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | ||
| 5405 | opposite of split-char. | ||
| 5406 | |||
| 5407 | **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | ||
| 5408 | of all the characters between BEG and END. | ||
| 5409 | |||
| 5410 | **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | ||
| 5411 | of all the characters in a string. | ||
| 5412 | |||
| 5413 | *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | ||
| 5414 | and specifying coding systems. | ||
| 5415 | |||
| 5416 | **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | ||
| 5417 | system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | ||
| 5418 | of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | ||
| 5419 | (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | ||
| 5420 | and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | ||
| 5421 | as what to do about code conversion.) | ||
| 5422 | |||
| 5423 | **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | ||
| 5424 | name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | ||
| 5425 | |||
| 5426 | **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | ||
| 5427 | for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | ||
| 5428 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | ||
| 5429 | |||
| 5430 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | ||
| 5431 | which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | ||
| 5432 | to match against a file name. | ||
| 5433 | |||
| 5434 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | ||
| 5435 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | ||
| 5436 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | ||
| 5437 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | ||
| 5438 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | ||
| 5439 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | ||
| 5440 | |||
| 5441 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | ||
| 5442 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | ||
| 5443 | |||
| 5444 | **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | ||
| 5445 | the coding system to use for network sockets. | ||
| 5446 | |||
| 5447 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | ||
| 5448 | which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | ||
| 5449 | either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | ||
| 5450 | service names. | ||
| 5451 | |||
| 5452 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | ||
| 5453 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | ||
| 5454 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | ||
| 5455 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | ||
| 5456 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | ||
| 5457 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | ||
| 5458 | |||
| 5459 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | ||
| 5460 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | ||
| 5461 | |||
| 5462 | **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | ||
| 5463 | for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | ||
| 5464 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | ||
| 5465 | start the subprocess. | ||
| 5466 | |||
| 5467 | **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | ||
| 5468 | systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | ||
| 5469 | when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | ||
| 5470 | (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | ||
| 5471 | to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | ||
| 5472 | |||
| 5473 | **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | ||
| 5474 | coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | ||
| 5475 | subprocess. | ||
| 5476 | |||
| 5477 | It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | ||
| 5478 | but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | ||
| 5479 | start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | ||
| 5480 | connection permanently or until overridden. | ||
| 5481 | |||
| 5482 | The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | ||
| 5483 | file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | ||
| 5484 | network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | ||
| 5485 | coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | ||
| 5486 | It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | ||
| 5487 | system for one operation at a time. | ||
| 5488 | |||
| 5489 | **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | ||
| 5490 | files, subprocesses or network connections. | ||
| 5491 | |||
| 5492 | **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | ||
| 5493 | coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | ||
| 5494 | The value is a cons cell, | ||
| 5495 | (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | ||
| 5496 | where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | ||
| 5497 | the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | ||
| 5498 | input to the subprocess. | ||
| 5499 | |||
| 5500 | **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | ||
| 5501 | change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | ||
| 5502 | |||
| 5503 | ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | ||
| 5504 | customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | ||
| 5505 | you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | ||
| 5506 | |||
| 5507 | You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | ||
| 5508 | variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | ||
| 5509 | information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | ||
| 5510 | legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | ||
| 5511 | customization. | ||
| 5512 | |||
| 5513 | Thus, instead of writing | ||
| 5514 | |||
| 5515 | (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | ||
| 5516 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | ||
| 5517 | |||
| 5518 | you would now write this: | ||
| 5519 | |||
| 5520 | (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | ||
| 5521 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | ||
| 5522 | :type 'boolean | ||
| 5523 | :group foo) | ||
| 5524 | |||
| 5525 | The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | ||
| 5526 | two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | ||
| 5527 | describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | ||
| 5528 | for a description of them. | ||
| 5529 | |||
| 5530 | The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | ||
| 5531 | should belong to. You define a new group like this: | ||
| 5532 | |||
| 5533 | (defgroup ispell nil | ||
| 5534 | "Spell checking using Ispell." | ||
| 5535 | :group 'processes) | ||
| 5536 | |||
| 5537 | The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | ||
| 5538 | group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | ||
| 5539 | but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | ||
| 5540 | to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | ||
| 5541 | second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | ||
| 5542 | |||
| 5543 | Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | ||
| 5544 | package should have just one group; a more complex package should | ||
| 5545 | have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | ||
| 5546 | package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | ||
| 5547 | first-level subgroups. | ||
| 5548 | |||
| 5549 | ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | ||
| 5550 | |||
| 5551 | This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | ||
| 5552 | separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | ||
| 5553 | |||
| 5554 | ** easy-mmode | ||
| 5555 | |||
| 5556 | The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | ||
| 5557 | developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | ||
| 5558 | only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | ||
| 5559 | predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | ||
| 5560 | `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | ||
| 5561 | `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | ||
| 5562 | |||
| 5563 | ** Text property changes | ||
| 5564 | |||
| 5565 | *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | ||
| 5566 | text property. | ||
| 5567 | |||
| 5568 | *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | ||
| 5569 | previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | ||
| 5570 | place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | ||
| 5571 | functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | ||
| 5572 | starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | ||
| 5573 | |||
| 5574 | If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | ||
| 5575 | LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | ||
| 5576 | of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | ||
| 5577 | position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | ||
| 5578 | |||
| 5579 | *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | ||
| 5580 | value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | ||
| 5581 | is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | ||
| 5582 | |||
| 5583 | ** Changes in invisibility features | ||
| 5584 | |||
| 5585 | *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | ||
| 5586 | hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | ||
| 5587 | is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | ||
| 5588 | should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | ||
| 5589 | would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | ||
| 5590 | make the overlay visible. | ||
| 5591 | |||
| 5592 | During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | ||
| 5593 | invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | ||
| 5594 | needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | ||
| 5595 | which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | ||
| 5596 | the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | ||
| 5597 | t when it should hide it. | ||
| 5598 | |||
| 5599 | *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | ||
| 5600 | |||
| 5601 | Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | ||
| 5602 | invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | ||
| 5603 | and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | ||
| 5604 | Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | ||
| 5605 | manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | ||
| 5606 | Here is an example of how to do this: | ||
| 5607 | |||
| 5608 | ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | ||
| 5609 | (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | ||
| 5610 | ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | ||
| 5611 | (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | ||
| 5612 | |||
| 5613 | ... | ||
| 5614 | (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | ||
| 5615 | |||
| 5616 | ... | ||
| 5617 | ;; When done with the overlays: | ||
| 5618 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | ||
| 5619 | ;; Or respectively: | ||
| 5620 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | ||
| 5621 | |||
| 5622 | ** Changes in syntax parsing. | ||
| 5623 | |||
| 5624 | *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | ||
| 5625 | `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | ||
| 5626 | obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | ||
| 5627 | `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | ||
| 5628 | |||
| 5629 | If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | ||
| 5630 | is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | ||
| 5631 | used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | ||
| 5632 | |||
| 5633 | When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | ||
| 5634 | character in the buffer is calculated thus: | ||
| 5635 | |||
| 5636 | a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | ||
| 5637 | is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | ||
| 5638 | |||
| 5639 | Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | ||
| 5640 | syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | ||
| 5641 | a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | ||
| 5642 | |||
| 5643 | b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | ||
| 5644 | is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | ||
| 5645 | (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | ||
| 5646 | determine the syntax type of the character. | ||
| 5647 | |||
| 5648 | c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | ||
| 5649 | of the current buffer. | ||
| 5650 | |||
| 5651 | *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | ||
| 5652 | value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | ||
| 5653 | for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | ||
| 5654 | |||
| 5655 | *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | ||
| 5656 | and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | ||
| 5657 | only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | ||
| 5658 | character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | ||
| 5659 | another character with the same code (unless quoted). | ||
| 5660 | |||
| 5661 | These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | ||
| 5662 | text property. | ||
| 5663 | |||
| 5664 | *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | ||
| 5665 | arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | ||
| 5666 | of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | ||
| 5667 | |||
| 5668 | *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | ||
| 5669 | (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | ||
| 5670 | element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | ||
| 5671 | nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | ||
| 5672 | string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | ||
| 5673 | |||
| 5674 | *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | ||
| 5675 | syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | ||
| 5676 | `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | ||
| 5677 | |||
| 5678 | ** Changes in face features | ||
| 5679 | |||
| 5680 | *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | ||
| 5681 | if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | ||
| 5682 | |||
| 5683 | *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | ||
| 5684 | of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | ||
| 5685 | |||
| 5686 | *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | ||
| 5687 | set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | ||
| 5688 | |||
| 5689 | *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | ||
| 5690 | set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | ||
| 5691 | |||
| 5692 | *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | ||
| 5693 | by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | ||
| 5694 | and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | ||
| 5695 | the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | ||
| 5696 | overlay property). | ||
| 5697 | |||
| 5698 | This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | ||
| 5699 | arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | ||
| 5700 | |||
| 5701 | ** Changes in file-handling functions | ||
| 5702 | |||
| 5703 | *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | ||
| 5704 | directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | ||
| 5705 | they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | ||
| 5706 | is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | ||
| 5707 | |||
| 5708 | This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | ||
| 5709 | begins with ~. | ||
| 5710 | |||
| 5711 | *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | ||
| 5712 | it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | ||
| 5713 | |||
| 5714 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | ||
| 5715 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | ||
| 5716 | |||
| 5717 | *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | ||
| 5718 | as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | ||
| 5719 | |||
| 5720 | *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | ||
| 5721 | character code conversion as well as other things. | ||
| 5722 | |||
| 5723 | Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | ||
| 5724 | (formerly it did not). | ||
| 5725 | |||
| 5726 | *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | ||
| 5727 | environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | ||
| 5728 | |||
| 5729 | *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | ||
| 5730 | instead of constant strings. | ||
| 5731 | |||
| 5732 | *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | ||
| 5733 | to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | ||
| 5734 | any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | ||
| 5735 | |||
| 5736 | substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | ||
| 5737 | in the same way as before. | ||
| 5738 | |||
| 5739 | *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | ||
| 5740 | The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | ||
| 5741 | which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | ||
| 5742 | |||
| 5743 | *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | ||
| 5744 | error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | ||
| 5745 | else, and returns nil. | ||
| 5746 | |||
| 5747 | *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | ||
| 5748 | directory cannot be listed. | ||
| 5749 | |||
| 5750 | ** Changes in minibuffer input | ||
| 5751 | |||
| 5752 | *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | ||
| 5753 | read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | ||
| 5754 | additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | ||
| 5755 | argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | ||
| 5756 | ways: | ||
| 5757 | |||
| 5758 | It is returned if the user enters empty input. | ||
| 5759 | It is available through the history command M-n. | ||
| 5760 | |||
| 5761 | *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | ||
| 5762 | read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | ||
| 5763 | argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | ||
| 5764 | minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | ||
| 5765 | enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | ||
| 5766 | |||
| 5767 | In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | ||
| 5768 | argument in this way. | ||
| 5769 | |||
| 5770 | *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | ||
| 5771 | from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | ||
| 5772 | minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | ||
| 5773 | |||
| 5774 | ** Echo area features | ||
| 5775 | |||
| 5776 | *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | ||
| 5777 | echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | ||
| 5778 | minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | ||
| 5779 | after the echo area is cleared. | ||
| 5780 | |||
| 5781 | *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | ||
| 5782 | in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | ||
| 5783 | |||
| 5784 | ** Keyboard input features | ||
| 5785 | |||
| 5786 | *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | ||
| 5787 | set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | ||
| 5788 | |||
| 5789 | *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | ||
| 5790 | received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | ||
| 5791 | by keyboard macros. | ||
| 5792 | |||
| 5793 | ** Frame-related changes | ||
| 5794 | |||
| 5795 | *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | ||
| 5796 | creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | ||
| 5797 | hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | ||
| 5798 | |||
| 5799 | *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | ||
| 5800 | the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | ||
| 5801 | has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | ||
| 5802 | |||
| 5803 | *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | ||
| 5804 | selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | ||
| 5805 | value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | ||
| 5806 | in the selected frame. | ||
| 5807 | |||
| 5808 | *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | ||
| 5809 | is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | ||
| 5810 | which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | ||
| 5811 | |||
| 5812 | ** X Windows features | ||
| 5813 | |||
| 5814 | *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | ||
| 5815 | x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | ||
| 5816 | x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | ||
| 5817 | |||
| 5818 | *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | ||
| 5819 | The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | ||
| 5820 | |||
| 5821 | *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | ||
| 5822 | MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | ||
| 5823 | A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | ||
| 5824 | |||
| 5825 | If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | ||
| 5826 | it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | ||
| 5827 | |||
| 5828 | ** Subprocess features | ||
| 5829 | |||
| 5830 | *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | ||
| 5831 | functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | ||
| 5832 | automatically. | ||
| 5833 | |||
| 5834 | *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | ||
| 5835 | and returns the output from the command as a string. | ||
| 5836 | |||
| 5837 | *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | ||
| 5838 | and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | ||
| 5839 | |||
| 5840 | ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | ||
| 5841 | does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | ||
| 5842 | |||
| 5843 | ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | ||
| 5844 | at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | ||
| 5845 | goes after the other menu items. | ||
| 5846 | |||
| 5847 | ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | ||
| 5848 | of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | ||
| 5849 | around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | ||
| 5850 | are in use. | ||
| 5851 | |||
| 5852 | The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | ||
| 5853 | series of several changes--if that seems safe. | ||
| 5854 | |||
| 5855 | Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | ||
| 5856 | after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | ||
| 5857 | form. | ||
| 5858 | |||
| 5859 | ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | ||
| 5860 | is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | ||
| 5861 | but its hook is still run. | ||
| 5862 | |||
| 5863 | ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | ||
| 5864 | for errors that are handled by condition-case. | ||
| 5865 | |||
| 5866 | If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | ||
| 5867 | regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | ||
| 5868 | useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | ||
| 5869 | |||
| 5870 | This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | ||
| 5871 | are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | ||
| 5872 | filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | ||
| 5873 | warned. | ||
| 5874 | |||
| 5875 | ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | ||
| 5876 | way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | ||
| 5877 | |||
| 5878 | ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | ||
| 5879 | integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | ||
| 5880 | functions like display-time. | ||
| 5881 | |||
| 5882 | ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | ||
| 5883 | name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | ||
| 5884 | |||
| 5885 | ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | ||
| 5886 | can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | ||
| 5887 | is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | ||
| 5888 | |||
| 5889 | ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | ||
| 5890 | if there is an error in compilation. | ||
| 5891 | |||
| 5892 | ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | ||
| 5893 | switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | ||
| 5894 | argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | ||
| 5895 | they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | ||
| 5896 | |||
| 5897 | ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | ||
| 5898 | Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | ||
| 5899 | the *scratch* buffer. | ||
| 5900 | |||
| 5901 | ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | ||
| 5902 | The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | ||
| 5903 | where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | ||
| 5904 | e.g., in Font Lock mode. | ||
| 5905 | |||
| 5906 | ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | ||
| 5907 | and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | ||
| 5908 | It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | ||
| 5909 | |||
| 5910 | ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | ||
| 5911 | using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | ||
| 5912 | variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | ||
| 5913 | and compose-mail-other-frame. | ||
| 5914 | |||
| 5915 | ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | ||
| 5916 | can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | ||
| 5917 | full name of the specified user will be returned. | ||
| 5918 | |||
| 5919 | ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | ||
| 5920 | of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | ||
| 5921 | where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | ||
| 5922 | in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | ||
| 5923 | option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | ||
| 5924 | files at all. | ||
| 5925 | |||
| 5926 | ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | ||
| 5927 | and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | ||
| 5928 | width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | ||
| 5929 | the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | ||
| 5930 | |||
| 5931 | For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | ||
| 5932 | minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | ||
| 5933 | with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | ||
| 5934 | is how %S normally pads to two positions. | ||
| 5935 | |||
| 5936 | ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | ||
| 5937 | |||
| 5938 | ** imenu.el changes. | ||
| 5939 | |||
| 5940 | You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | ||
| 5941 | item from menu created by imenu. | ||
| 5942 | |||
| 5943 | An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | ||
| 5944 | #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | ||
| 5945 | select one of those items. | ||
| 5946 | |||
| 5947 | * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | ||
| 5948 | |||
| 5949 | * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | ||
| 5950 | |||
| 5951 | ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | ||
| 5952 | mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | ||
| 5953 | |||
| 5954 | ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | ||
| 5955 | use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | ||
| 5956 | Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | ||
| 5957 | |||
| 5958 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | ||
| 5959 | |||
| 5960 | ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | ||
| 5961 | To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | ||
| 5962 | |||
| 5963 | ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | ||
| 5964 | conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | ||
| 5965 | matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | ||
| 5966 | expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | ||
| 5967 | word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | ||
| 5968 | all caps. | ||
| 5969 | |||
| 5970 | ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | ||
| 5971 | at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | ||
| 5972 | |||
| 5973 | When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | ||
| 5974 | does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | ||
| 5975 | as in previous Emacs versions. | ||
| 5976 | |||
| 5977 | ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | ||
| 5978 | non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | ||
| 5979 | time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | ||
| 5980 | frames. | ||
| 5981 | |||
| 5982 | ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | ||
| 5983 | if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | ||
| 5984 | This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | ||
| 5985 | Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | ||
| 5986 | accident. | ||
| 5987 | |||
| 5988 | ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | ||
| 5989 | keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | ||
| 5990 | It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | ||
| 5991 | line and then executing the macro. | ||
| 5992 | |||
| 5993 | This command is not new, but was never documented before. | ||
| 5994 | |||
| 5995 | ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | ||
| 5996 | (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | ||
| 5997 | characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | ||
| 5998 | characters. | ||
| 5999 | |||
| 6000 | ** Font Lock mode | ||
| 6001 | |||
| 6002 | *** Font Lock support modes | ||
| 6003 | |||
| 6004 | Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | ||
| 6005 | below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | ||
| 6006 | hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | ||
| 6007 | to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | ||
| 6008 | Font Lock mode is enabled. | ||
| 6009 | |||
| 6010 | For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | ||
| 6011 | |||
| 6012 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | ||
| 6013 | |||
| 6014 | in your ~/.emacs. | ||
| 6015 | |||
| 6016 | *** lazy-lock | ||
| 6017 | |||
| 6018 | The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | ||
| 6019 | only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | ||
| 6020 | becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | ||
| 6021 | Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | ||
| 6022 | occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | ||
| 6023 | buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | ||
| 6024 | Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | ||
| 6025 | |||
| 6026 | To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | ||
| 6027 | |||
| 6028 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | ||
| 6029 | |||
| 6030 | To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. | ||
| 6031 | |||
| 6032 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | ||
| 6033 | |||
| 6034 | *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | ||
| 6035 | paren and key. | ||
| 6036 | |||
| 6037 | *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | ||
| 6038 | supported. | ||
| 6039 | |||
| 6040 | ** Gnus changes. | ||
| 6041 | |||
| 6042 | Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | ||
| 6043 | commands and variables have been added. There should be no | ||
| 6044 | significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | ||
| 6045 | previously released version, except in the message composition area. | ||
| 6046 | |||
| 6047 | Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | ||
| 6048 | between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | ||
| 6049 | |||
| 6050 | *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization | ||
| 6051 | variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now | ||
| 6052 | obsolete. | ||
| 6053 | |||
| 6054 | *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | ||
| 6055 | missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | ||
| 6056 | |||
| 6057 | (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | ||
| 6058 | |||
| 6059 | *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | ||
| 6060 | |||
| 6061 | To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | ||
| 6062 | |||
| 6063 | *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | ||
| 6064 | referred. | ||
| 6065 | |||
| 6066 | *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | ||
| 6067 | |||
| 6068 | (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | ||
| 6069 | |||
| 6070 | *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | ||
| 6071 | |||
| 6072 | (setq gnus-use-trees t) | ||
| 6073 | |||
| 6074 | *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | ||
| 6075 | buffers. | ||
| 6076 | |||
| 6077 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | ||
| 6078 | |||
| 6079 | *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | ||
| 6080 | |||
| 6081 | `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | ||
| 6082 | |||
| 6083 | *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | ||
| 6084 | |||
| 6085 | (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | ||
| 6086 | |||
| 6087 | *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | ||
| 6088 | |||
| 6089 | Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | ||
| 6090 | |||
| 6091 | *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | ||
| 6092 | is possible. | ||
| 6093 | |||
| 6094 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | ||
| 6095 | |||
| 6096 | *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | ||
| 6097 | groups of groups. | ||
| 6098 | |||
| 6099 | *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | ||
| 6100 | |||
| 6101 | *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | ||
| 6102 | batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. | ||
| 6103 | |||
| 6104 | *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | ||
| 6105 | |||
| 6106 | *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | ||
| 6107 | |||
| 6108 | *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | ||
| 6109 | |||
| 6110 | For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | ||
| 6111 | |||
| 6112 | *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | ||
| 6113 | expiration times. | ||
| 6114 | |||
| 6115 | *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | ||
| 6116 | |||
| 6117 | *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | ||
| 6118 | process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | ||
| 6119 | |||
| 6120 | *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | ||
| 6121 | articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | ||
| 6122 | bound to keys on the `/' submap. | ||
| 6123 | |||
| 6124 | *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | ||
| 6125 | articles with the `*' command. | ||
| 6126 | |||
| 6127 | *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | ||
| 6128 | |||
| 6129 | *** Article headers can be buttonized. | ||
| 6130 | |||
| 6131 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | ||
| 6132 | |||
| 6133 | *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | ||
| 6134 | |||
| 6135 | *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the | ||
| 6136 | `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. | ||
| 6137 | |||
| 6138 | *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | ||
| 6139 | buffer. | ||
| 6140 | |||
| 6141 | *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | ||
| 6142 | |||
| 6143 | *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | ||
| 6144 | |||
| 6145 | *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | ||
| 6146 | |||
| 6147 | (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | ||
| 6148 | |||
| 6149 | *** Groups can be made permanently visible. | ||
| 6150 | |||
| 6151 | (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | ||
| 6152 | |||
| 6153 | *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. | ||
| 6154 | |||
| 6155 | *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | ||
| 6156 | |||
| 6157 | *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. | ||
| 6158 | |||
| 6159 | (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function | ||
| 6160 | 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) | ||
| 6161 | |||
| 6162 | *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | ||
| 6163 | refetching. | ||
| 6164 | |||
| 6165 | (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | ||
| 6166 | |||
| 6167 | *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | ||
| 6168 | buffer to allow easier treatment. | ||
| 6169 | |||
| 6170 | *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | ||
| 6171 | |||
| 6172 | *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | ||
| 6173 | |||
| 6174 | (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | ||
| 6175 | |||
| 6176 | *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | ||
| 6177 | articles. | ||
| 6178 | |||
| 6179 | (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | ||
| 6180 | |||
| 6181 | *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. | ||
| 6182 | |||
| 6183 | *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | ||
| 6184 | cited text to hide is now customizable. | ||
| 6185 | |||
| 6186 | (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | ||
| 6187 | |||
| 6188 | *** Boring headers can be hidden. | ||
| 6189 | |||
| 6190 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | ||
| 6191 | |||
| 6192 | *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | ||
| 6193 | |||
| 6194 | *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | ||
| 6195 | |||
| 6196 | The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | ||
| 6197 | in greater detail. | ||
| 6198 | |||
| 6199 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | ||
| 6200 | |||
| 6201 | ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | ||
| 6202 | second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | ||
| 6203 | asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | ||
| 6204 | exists. | ||
| 6205 | |||
| 6206 | ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | ||
| 6207 | as well as lists. | ||
| 6208 | |||
| 6209 | ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | ||
| 6210 | of a given keymap. | ||
| 6211 | |||
| 6212 | ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | ||
| 6213 | given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | ||
| 6214 | keymap or nil. | ||
| 6215 | |||
| 6216 | ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | ||
| 6217 | an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | ||
| 6218 | name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | ||
| 6219 | menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | ||
| 6220 | equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | ||
| 6221 | alias. | ||
| 6222 | |||
| 6223 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | ||
| 6224 | |||
| 6225 | ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | ||
| 6226 | |||
| 6227 | Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | ||
| 6228 | This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | ||
| 6229 | was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | ||
| 6230 | far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | ||
| 6231 | pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | ||
| 6232 | |||
| 6233 | For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | ||
| 6234 | you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | ||
| 6235 | `http://www.vtw.org/'. | ||
| 6236 | |||
| 6237 | ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | ||
| 6238 | |||
| 6239 | The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | ||
| 6240 | do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | ||
| 6241 | It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | ||
| 6242 | much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | ||
| 6243 | chapter of the manual for details. | ||
| 6244 | |||
| 6245 | However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | ||
| 6246 | customization variables take effect. | ||
| 6247 | |||
| 6248 | ** Marking with the mouse. | ||
| 6249 | |||
| 6250 | When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | ||
| 6251 | highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | ||
| 6252 | using M-x transient-mark-mode. | ||
| 6253 | |||
| 6254 | ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | ||
| 6255 | |||
| 6256 | *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | ||
| 6257 | |||
| 6258 | *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | ||
| 6259 | to work on NT only and not on 95.) | ||
| 6260 | |||
| 6261 | *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | ||
| 6262 | in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | ||
| 6263 | you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | ||
| 6264 | application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | ||
| 6265 | applications, these problems are significant. | ||
| 6266 | |||
| 6267 | If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | ||
| 6268 | likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | ||
| 6269 | However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | ||
| 6270 | will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | ||
| 6271 | other DOS application as a subprocess. | ||
| 6272 | |||
| 6273 | Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | ||
| 6274 | You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | ||
| 6275 | |||
| 6276 | If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | ||
| 6277 | subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | ||
| 6278 | have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | ||
| 6279 | Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | ||
| 6280 | separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | ||
| 6281 | Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | ||
| 6282 | |||
| 6283 | ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | ||
| 6284 | |||
| 6285 | This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | ||
| 6286 | which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | ||
| 6287 | minibuffer contains. | ||
| 6288 | |||
| 6289 | ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | ||
| 6290 | |||
| 6291 | The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | ||
| 6292 | It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | ||
| 6293 | It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | ||
| 6294 | affects just the displayed title of the frame. | ||
| 6295 | |||
| 6296 | The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | ||
| 6297 | it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | ||
| 6298 | and also serves as the default for the displayed title | ||
| 6299 | when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | ||
| 6300 | |||
| 6301 | ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | ||
| 6302 | enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | ||
| 6303 | |||
| 6304 | ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | ||
| 6305 | F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | ||
| 6306 | Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | ||
| 6307 | |||
| 6308 | If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | ||
| 6309 | menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | ||
| 6310 | something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | ||
| 6311 | the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | ||
| 6312 | |||
| 6313 | Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | ||
| 6314 | |||
| 6315 | ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | ||
| 6316 | to replace the characters it "deletes". | ||
| 6317 | |||
| 6318 | ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | ||
| 6319 | |||
| 6320 | ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | ||
| 6321 | a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | ||
| 6322 | select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | ||
| 6323 | It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | ||
| 6324 | immediately after the selected one. | ||
| 6325 | |||
| 6326 | This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | ||
| 6327 | made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | ||
| 6328 | |||
| 6329 | ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | ||
| 6330 | |||
| 6331 | Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | ||
| 6332 | directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | ||
| 6333 | If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | ||
| 6334 | Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | ||
| 6335 | recover-session. | ||
| 6336 | |||
| 6337 | You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | ||
| 6338 | auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | ||
| 6339 | will not work. | ||
| 6340 | |||
| 6341 | Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | ||
| 6342 | normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | ||
| 6343 | this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | ||
| 6344 | bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | ||
| 6345 | now that the bug is fixed. | ||
| 6346 | |||
| 6347 | ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | ||
| 6348 | |||
| 6349 | There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | ||
| 6350 | when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | ||
| 6351 | Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | ||
| 6352 | which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | ||
| 6353 | |||
| 6354 | If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | ||
| 6355 | telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | ||
| 6356 | VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | ||
| 6357 | the link is visited and a warning displayed. | ||
| 6358 | |||
| 6359 | ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | ||
| 6360 | Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | ||
| 6361 | is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | ||
| 6362 | |||
| 6363 | There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | ||
| 6364 | Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | ||
| 6365 | enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | ||
| 6366 | The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | ||
| 6367 | remain normal. | ||
| 6368 | |||
| 6369 | ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | ||
| 6370 | header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | ||
| 6371 | |||
| 6372 | Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | ||
| 6373 | known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | ||
| 6374 | offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | ||
| 6375 | Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | ||
| 6376 | |||
| 6377 | Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | ||
| 6378 | of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | ||
| 6379 | a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | ||
| 6380 | name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | ||
| 6381 | documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | ||
| 6382 | `mail-directory-stream'.) | ||
| 6383 | |||
| 6384 | ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | ||
| 6385 | skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | ||
| 6386 | characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | ||
| 6387 | with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | ||
| 6388 | |||
| 6389 | Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | ||
| 6390 | - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | ||
| 6391 | wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | ||
| 6392 | |||
| 6393 | The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | ||
| 6394 | less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | ||
| 6395 | headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | ||
| 6396 | Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | ||
| 6397 | Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | ||
| 6398 | fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | ||
| 6399 | to a limitation in font-lock). | ||
| 6400 | |||
| 6401 | External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | ||
| 6402 | |||
| 6403 | ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | ||
| 6404 | buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | ||
| 6405 | buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | ||
| 6406 | this example: | ||
| 6407 | |||
| 6408 | (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | ||
| 6409 | '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | ||
| 6410 | |||
| 6411 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | ||
| 6412 | |||
| 6413 | *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | ||
| 6414 | |||
| 6415 | *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | ||
| 6416 | |||
| 6417 | *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | ||
| 6418 | |||
| 6419 | *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | ||
| 6420 | entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | ||
| 6421 | will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | ||
| 6422 | isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | ||
| 6423 | (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | ||
| 6424 | The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | ||
| 6425 | |||
| 6426 | *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | ||
| 6427 | does the same job. | ||
| 6428 | |||
| 6429 | *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | ||
| 6430 | "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | ||
| 6431 | |||
| 6432 | *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | ||
| 6433 | text. | ||
| 6434 | |||
| 6435 | ** Font Lock mode | ||
| 6436 | |||
| 6437 | *** Global Font Lock mode | ||
| 6438 | |||
| 6439 | Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | ||
| 6440 | new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | ||
| 6441 | font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | ||
| 6442 | turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | ||
| 6443 | on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | ||
| 6444 | |||
| 6445 | For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | ||
| 6446 | |||
| 6447 | (global-font-lock-mode t) | ||
| 6448 | |||
| 6449 | in your ~/.emacs. | ||
| 6450 | |||
| 6451 | *** Local Refontification | ||
| 6452 | |||
| 6453 | In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | ||
| 6454 | However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | ||
| 6455 | those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | ||
| 6456 | command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | ||
| 6457 | |||
| 6458 | In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | ||
| 6459 | (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | ||
| 6460 | current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | ||
| 6461 | above and below point. | ||
| 6462 | |||
| 6463 | With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | ||
| 6464 | |||
| 6465 | ** Follow mode | ||
| 6466 | |||
| 6467 | Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | ||
| 6468 | buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | ||
| 6469 | side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | ||
| 6470 | they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | ||
| 6471 | split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | ||
| 6472 | follow-mode. | ||
| 6473 | |||
| 6474 | M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | ||
| 6475 | |||
| 6476 | To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | ||
| 6477 | command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | ||
| 6478 | |||
| 6479 | ** hide-show changes. | ||
| 6480 | |||
| 6481 | The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | ||
| 6482 | to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | ||
| 6483 | normal hooks. | ||
| 6484 | |||
| 6485 | ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | ||
| 6486 | The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | ||
| 6487 | |||
| 6488 | ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | ||
| 6489 | recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are | ||
| 6490 | those that begin a function, record, or macro. | ||
| 6491 | |||
| 6492 | ** MSDOS Changes | ||
| 6493 | |||
| 6494 | *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | ||
| 6495 | Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | ||
| 6496 | |||
| 6497 | *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | ||
| 6498 | and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | ||
| 6499 | |||
| 6500 | *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | ||
| 6501 | |||
| 6502 | *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | ||
| 6503 | pressing both mouse buttons. | ||
| 6504 | |||
| 6505 | *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | ||
| 6506 | restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | ||
| 6507 | are: | ||
| 6508 | |||
| 6509 | **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | ||
| 6510 | now works. | ||
| 6511 | |||
| 6512 | **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | ||
| 6513 | |||
| 6514 | **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | ||
| 6515 | implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | ||
| 6516 | |||
| 6517 | **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | ||
| 6518 | |||
| 6519 | **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | ||
| 6520 | |||
| 6521 | **** `M-x recover-session' works. | ||
| 6522 | |||
| 6523 | **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | ||
| 6524 | |||
| 6525 | **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | ||
| 6526 | |||
| 6527 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | ||
| 6528 | |||
| 6529 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | ||
| 6530 | tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | ||
| 6531 | remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | ||
| 6532 | this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | ||
| 6533 | behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | ||
| 6534 | |||
| 6535 | ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | ||
| 6536 | |||
| 6537 | The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | ||
| 6538 | not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | ||
| 6539 | need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | ||
| 6540 | be different. | ||
| 6541 | |||
| 6542 | It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | ||
| 6543 | than `system-type'. | ||
| 6544 | |||
| 6545 | See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | ||
| 6546 | |||
| 6547 | ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | ||
| 6548 | now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | ||
| 6549 | |||
| 6550 | ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | ||
| 6551 | that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | ||
| 6552 | |||
| 6553 | ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | ||
| 6554 | no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | ||
| 6555 | reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | ||
| 6556 | |||
| 6557 | The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | ||
| 6558 | to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | ||
| 6559 | like this: | ||
| 6560 | |||
| 6561 | (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | ||
| 6562 | |||
| 6563 | SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | ||
| 6564 | It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | ||
| 6565 | becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | ||
| 6566 | |||
| 6567 | REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | ||
| 6568 | seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | ||
| 6569 | means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | ||
| 6570 | |||
| 6571 | *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | ||
| 6572 | up if too much time passes. | ||
| 6573 | |||
| 6574 | (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | ||
| 6575 | |||
| 6576 | This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | ||
| 6577 | If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | ||
| 6578 | of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | ||
| 6579 | form in BODY. | ||
| 6580 | |||
| 6581 | *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | ||
| 6582 | a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | ||
| 6583 | call looks like this: | ||
| 6584 | |||
| 6585 | (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | ||
| 6586 | |||
| 6587 | SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | ||
| 6588 | runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | ||
| 6589 | timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | ||
| 6590 | ARGS. | ||
| 6591 | |||
| 6592 | Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | ||
| 6593 | command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | ||
| 6594 | command. | ||
| 6595 | |||
| 6596 | REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | ||
| 6597 | time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | ||
| 6598 | does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | ||
| 6599 | each time Emacs becomes idle. | ||
| 6600 | |||
| 6601 | If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | ||
| 6602 | idle for SECS seconds. | ||
| 6603 | |||
| 6604 | *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | ||
| 6605 | all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | ||
| 6606 | programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | ||
| 6607 | instead. | ||
| 6608 | |||
| 6609 | *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | ||
| 6610 | there is no answer within a certain time. | ||
| 6611 | |||
| 6612 | (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | ||
| 6613 | |||
| 6614 | asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | ||
| 6615 | within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | ||
| 6616 | Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | ||
| 6617 | |||
| 6618 | ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | ||
| 6619 | arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | ||
| 6620 | meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | ||
| 6621 | arguments in between are ignored. | ||
| 6622 | |||
| 6623 | This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | ||
| 6624 | the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | ||
| 6625 | |||
| 6626 | ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | ||
| 6627 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | ||
| 6628 | /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | ||
| 6629 | site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | ||
| 6630 | version. | ||
| 6631 | |||
| 6632 | It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | ||
| 6633 | version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | ||
| 6634 | for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | ||
| 6635 | has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | ||
| 6636 | and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | ||
| 6637 | problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | ||
| 6638 | |||
| 6639 | ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | ||
| 6640 | .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | ||
| 6641 | systems with limited file name syntax. | ||
| 6642 | |||
| 6643 | Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | ||
| 6644 | convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | ||
| 6645 | for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | ||
| 6646 | completions.el: | ||
| 6647 | |||
| 6648 | (defvar save-completions-file-name | ||
| 6649 | (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | ||
| 6650 | "*The filename to save completions to.") | ||
| 6651 | |||
| 6652 | This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | ||
| 6653 | depends on the operating system, because the definition of | ||
| 6654 | convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | ||
| 6655 | Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | ||
| 6656 | MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | ||
| 6657 | |||
| 6658 | ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | ||
| 6659 | rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | ||
| 6660 | minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | ||
| 6661 | |||
| 6662 | ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | ||
| 6663 | marker from its buffer position. | ||
| 6664 | |||
| 6665 | ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | ||
| 6666 | Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | ||
| 6667 | The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | ||
| 6668 | |||
| 6669 | ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | ||
| 6670 | that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | ||
| 6671 | condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | ||
| 6672 | of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | ||
| 6673 | matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | ||
| 6674 | regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | ||
| 6675 | |||
| 6676 | This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | ||
| 6677 | errors that happen often during editing. | ||
| 6678 | |||
| 6679 | ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | ||
| 6680 | into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | ||
| 6681 | puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | ||
| 6682 | |||
| 6683 | ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | ||
| 6684 | now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | ||
| 6685 | |||
| 6686 | ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | ||
| 6687 | a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | ||
| 6688 | name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | ||
| 6689 | to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | ||
| 6690 | and not get-buffer-window. | ||
| 6691 | |||
| 6692 | ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | ||
| 6693 | calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | ||
| 6694 | being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | ||
| 6695 | |||
| 6696 | If you use this feature, you should set the variable | ||
| 6697 | buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | ||
| 6698 | property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | ||
| 6699 | non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | ||
| 6700 | are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | ||
| 6701 | property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | ||
| 6702 | over and over for the same text. | ||
| 6703 | |||
| 6704 | ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | ||
| 6705 | |||
| 6706 | *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | ||
| 6707 | in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | ||
| 6708 | |||
| 6709 | ;; @(#) HEADER: text | ||
| 6710 | ;; $HEADER: text $ | ||
| 6711 | |||
| 6712 | in addition to the normal | ||
| 6713 | |||
| 6714 | ;; HEADER: text | ||
| 6715 | |||
| 6716 | *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | ||
| 6717 | checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | ||
| 6718 | lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | ||
| 6719 | |||
| 6720 | * For older news, see the file ONEWS. | ||
| 6721 | |||
| 6722 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | ||
| 6723 | Copyright information: | ||
| 6724 | |||
| 6725 | Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | ||
| 6726 | |||
| 6727 | Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | ||
| 6728 | of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | ||
| 6729 | copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | ||
| 6730 | thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | ||
| 6731 | |||
| 6732 | Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | ||
| 6733 | of this document, or of portions of it, | ||
| 6734 | under the above conditions, provided also that they | ||
| 6735 | carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | ||
| 6736 | |||
| 6737 | Local variables: | ||
| 6738 | mode: outline | ||
| 6739 | paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | ||
| 6740 | end: | ||